Ariesogeo User Guide

ariesoGEO User Guide
Version 6.1.1
Issued May 2015
The information contained in this document and any documentation referred to herein or attached
hereto, is of a confidential nature and is supplied for the purpose of discussion only and for no other
purpose.
This information should only be disclosed to those individuals directly involved with consideration
and evaluation of any proposals, all of who shall be made aware of this requirement for
confidentiality.
All trademarks are hereby acknowledged.
Page 2
Commercial-in-Confidence © Copyright 2015 JDSU UK Ltd
Arieso Solutions
JDSU acquired Arieso in March 2013, adding the world's leading intelligent, location aware solutions for
mobile network operators to its Communications Test portfolio. Arieso solutions locate, store and analyse
data from billions of mobile connection events, giving operators a rich source of intelligence to help boost
network performance and enrich user experience. This intelligence transforms the effectiveness of network
performance engineering; enables customer-centric self-optimising networks; creates true understanding of
customer experience and enables monetization of unique insights.
The proven Arieso carrier grade solutions are resilient and highly scalable. Operating on five continents,
clients include mobile operator groups such as América Móvil, AT&T, MTN, Telefónica and Vodafone, and
leading equipment vendors including Alcatel Lucent and NSN.
JDSU (NASDAQ: JDSU; and TSX: JDU) innovates and collaborates with customers to build and operate the
highest-performing and highest-value networks in the world. Our diverse technology portfolio also fights
counterfeiting and enables high-powered commercial lasers for a range of applications. Learn more about
JDSU at www.jdsu.com and follow us on JDSU Perspectives, Twitter, Facebook and YouTube.
More information on Arieso can be found at www.arieso.com.
Page 3
Contents
1 Introduction 11
1.1 ...................................................................................................................................
The need for ariesoGEO 11
1.2 ...................................................................................................................................
What are ariesoGEO features today 12
1.3 ...................................................................................................................................
What can be done with ariesoGEO 12
1.4 ...................................................................................................................................
Where the data comes from 12
1.5 ...................................................................................................................................
Analysing the data 13
1.6 ...................................................................................................................................
Sensitive Personal Information 14
1.7 ...................................................................................................................................
Further Information 14
1.7.1 Support ............................................................................................................................................. 15
...................................................................................................................................
1.8 Related Services 15
2 Getting Started 16
2.1 ...................................................................................................................................
Logging in to ariesoGEO 16
2.2 ...................................................................................................................................
Running Analyses 16
2.2.1 Analysis Icons ............................................................................................................................................. 17
.............................................................................................................................................
2.2.2 Analysis Parameters 18
.............................................................................................................................................
2.2.3 Recalculating Analyses 18
...................................................................................................................................
2.3 Working in ariesoGEO 19
2.3.1 Presentation .............................................................................................................................................
Canvas 20
.................................................................................................................................................
Control Taskbar 20
.................................................................................................................................................
Changing Display Properties 20
.................................................................................................................................................
Resizing, Moving and Deleting Controls 21
.................................................................................................................................................
Message Log 22
2.3.2 ............................................................................................................................................. 22
Control Toolbox
................................................................................................................................................. 23
Map Control
Chart.................................................................................................................................................
Control 24
.................................................................................................................................................
Legend Control 24
.................................................................................................................................................
Table Control 25
.................................................................................................................................................
Textbox Control 25
2.3.3 ............................................................................................................................................. 26
Data Explorer
Data .................................................................................................................................................
Explorer Icons 26
.................................................................................................................................................
Analyses 27
.................................................................................................................................................
Color Schemes 27
.................................................................................................................................................
Filters 28
.................................................................................................................................................
Call Drilldown Layouts 28
.................................................................................................................................................
Network Themes 29
.................................................................................................................................................
Local Folders 29
2.3.4 .............................................................................................................................................
Menus and Toolbars 30
Home.................................................................................................................................................
Ribbon Menu 30
.................................................................................................................................................
Canvas Ribbon Menu 31
Page 4
.................................................................................................................................................
Optimization Ribbon Menu 32
.................................................................................................................................................
Help Ribbon Menu 32
.................................................................................................................................................
ariesoGEO Quick Access Toolbar 33
2.4 ...................................................................................................................................
Using Filters 33
2.4.1 Geographical .............................................................................................................................................
Filtering 34
............................................................................................................................................. 37
2.4.2 Polygon Filtering
.................................................................................................................................................
Import Polygons 38
2.4.3 Adding Filter .............................................................................................................................................
Values 38
2.4.4 Filter Hierarchy............................................................................................................................................. 40
2.5 ...................................................................................................................................
Finding Sites and Cells 41
2.5.1 Network Search .............................................................................................................................................
dialog 41
2.6 ...................................................................................................................................
Saving Documents 42
.............................................................................................................................................
2.6.1 ariesoGEO Document Types 42
.............................................................................................................................................
2.6.2 Saving the Canvas as an Image 43
2.7 ...................................................................................................................................
Changing ariesoGEO Configuration 43
2.7.1 GEO Area............................................................................................................................................. 44
2.7.2 Application .............................................................................................................................................
Startup 44
2.7.3 Directories............................................................................................................................................. 44
2.7.4 Correlation .............................................................................................................................................
Module 44
2.7.5 Time Period ............................................................................................................................................. 45
2.7.6 Geographical .............................................................................................................................................
Area 45
2.7.7 Other Parameters............................................................................................................................................. 45
2.7.8 Analysis Results.............................................................................................................................................
Cache 45
2.7.9 Map Control .............................................................................................................................................
Defaults 46
2.7.10 Visible Columns............................................................................................................................................. 46
2.7.11 Layer 3 ............................................................................................................................................. 47
............................................................................................................................................. 47
2.7.12 Problem Identification
2.8 ................................................................................................................................... 47
Dashboards
2.8.1 Getting Started ............................................................................................................................................. 48
2.8.2 Changing.............................................................................................................................................
Dashboard Layout 48
2.8.3 Changing.............................................................................................................................................
a Panel 49
3 Working with Analyses 51
3.1 ...................................................................................................................................
Common Analysis Tasks 51
3.1.1 Dropped Call .............................................................................................................................................
Investigation 51
...................................................................................................................................
3.2 Working with Map Analyses 52
3.2.1 Displaying.............................................................................................................................................
an Analysis 53
.................................................................................................................................................
Viewing and Exporting Map Data 54
.................................................................................................................................................
Ranking Points in a Points Analysis 55
3.2.2 ............................................................................................................................................. 55
Map Properties
3.2.3 .............................................................................................................................................
Map Control Toolbar 56
.................................................................................................................................................
Back/Forward View 56
.................................................................................................................................................
Show/Hide Layer View 56
.................................................................................................................................................
Searchable Map Control 56
................................................................................................................................................. 57
Zooming
.................................................................................................................................................
Viewing Site and Cell Details 58
.................................................................................................................................................
Analyzing a specific cell 59
.................................................................................................................................................
Panning the map 60
.................................................................................................................................................
Spider Call Identify 60
Page 5
Spider.................................................................................................................................................
Neighbor Identify 61
.................................................................................................................................................
Scrambling Code Connector 62
.................................................................................................................................................
PCI Connector 63
.................................................................................................................................................
Raster Analysis at Point 63
.................................................................................................................................................
Selected Cells 64
.................................................................................................................................................
Drawing Polygons 65
Ruler ................................................................................................................................................. 66
.................................................................................................................................................
Full Extents 67
.................................................................................................................................................
Refresh 67
.................................................................................................................................................
Google Earth Export 68
3.2.4 ............................................................................................................................................. 70
Layer View
.................................................................................................................................................
Changing Layer Visibility 70
.................................................................................................................................................
Changing Layer Order 71
.................................................................................................................................................
Deleting a layer 71
.................................................................................................................................................
Network Layers 72
Importing Additional Network Layers
......................................................................................................................... 73
.................................................................................................................................................
Height and Region Layers 74
.................................................................................................................................................
Virtual Earth Layer 75
.................................................................................................................................................
Analysis Layer Visibility 76
.................................................................................................................................................
Adding Labels 76
.................................................................................................................................................
Exporting Map Layers 77
3.3 ...................................................................................................................................
Working with Table Analyses 78
3.4 ...................................................................................................................................
Working with Chart Analyses 80
3.4.1 Line Charts .............................................................................................................................................
Example 80
3.4.2 Pie Chart .............................................................................................................................................
Example 81
3.5 ...................................................................................................................................
Using the Color Scheme Editor 84
.............................................................................................................................................
3.5.1 Changing the Canvas, Table and Chart Background Colors 85
3.5.2 Gradient Editor ............................................................................................................................................. 87
3.5.3 Generate Table ............................................................................................................................................. 87
3.6 ...................................................................................................................................
Using Variables 88
3.6.1 Creating New .............................................................................................................................................
Variables 89
3.6.2 Using Variables .............................................................................................................................................
in the Filter Editor 90
3.7 ...................................................................................................................................
Using Lists 91
3.7.1 Manage List .............................................................................................................................................
Names 92
3.8 ...................................................................................................................................
Running Sets of Analyses 93
3.9 ...................................................................................................................................
Scheduling Analyses 94
...................................................................................................................................
3.10 Arranging Analyses on the Canvas 94
4 Advanced Features 96
4.1 ...................................................................................................................................
Advanced Raster Analysis 96
4.1.1 Grid Calculator ............................................................................................................................................. 97
.................................................................................................................................................
Grid Calculator Usage 98
.................................................................................................................................................
Grid Calculator Mathematical Functions 99
Grid.................................................................................................................................................
Calculator Example 100
4.1.2 .............................................................................................................................................
Cell Footprint Analysis 102
.................................................................................................................................................
Running Footprint Analysis 102
4.1.3 Cell KPIs.............................................................................................................................................
vs Distance 103
Cell .................................................................................................................................................
KPIs vs Distance Parameters 103
Page 6
Cell .................................................................................................................................................
KPIs vs Distance Output 103
4.2 ...................................................................................................................................
Call Drill Down Analysis 105
4.2.1 Spider Drill .............................................................................................................................................
Down 105
.................................................................................................................................................
Launching the Spider 106
.................................................................................................................................................
Spider, Properties Tab 107
.................................................................................................................................................
Spider, Spider Tab 115
4.2.2 .............................................................................................................................................
Layer 3 Drill Down 115
.................................................................................................................................................
Launching the Layer 3 Functionality 115
.................................................................................................................................................
Layout of the Layer 3 Control 116
.................................................................................................................................................
Layer 3 Charts 117
Line Charts ......................................................................................................................... 118
Bar Charts ......................................................................................................................... 124
Event Charts ......................................................................................................................... 129
Filtering the Event Chart and Table
......................................................................................................................... 129
.................................................................................................................................................
Layer 3 Message Table 130
Layer 3 Message.........................................................................................................................
Details 131
Map.................................................................................................................................................
Display 131
.................................................................................................................................................
Selection Synchronisation 134
.................................................................................................................................................
Saving/Loading Layer 3 Layouts 135
.................................................................................................................................................
Layer 3 Display Options 135
4.3 ...................................................................................................................................
RF Network Optimization 136
4.3.1 Missing .............................................................................................................................................
Neighbor 137
.................................................................................................................................................
Missing Neighbor Analysis (GSM) 137
.................................................................................................................................................
Missing Neighbor Analysis (UMTS) 138
4.3.2 Neighbor.............................................................................................................................................
Planning 138
................................................................................................................................................. 139
Scenarios
Time.................................................................................................................................................
Range 139
.................................................................................................................................................
Choose the Cells 140
.................................................................................................................................................
Frequency Selection 141
.................................................................................................................................................
Set the Parameters 141
Parameters (UMTS) ......................................................................................................................... 142
Parameters (IRAT) ......................................................................................................................... 144
Parameters (GSM) ......................................................................................................................... 145
................................................................................................................................................. 146
Scheduling
................................................................................................................................................. 147
Actuation
Start.................................................................................................................................................
Calculation 148
.................................................................................................................................................
Viewing Calculated Neighbor Plans 148
Neighbor Plan Contents ......................................................................................................................... 149
Explanation of Relations and Reasons
......................................................................................................................... 151
Adding and Editing Relationships
......................................................................................................................... 153
.................................................................................................................................................
Spider Representations of Neighbors 154
4.3.3 Problem.............................................................................................................................................
Identification 155
.................................................................................................................................................
Configure Filter 156
................................................................................................................................................. 156
Scheduling
.................................................................................................................................................
Problem Selection 157
.................................................................................................................................................
Prioritizing Problem Areas 158
.................................................................................................................................................
Drilling down into Problems 159
.................................................................................................................................................
Using saved problem searches 160
.................................................................................................................................................
Triggering Neighbor Planning 161
4.3.4 .............................................................................................................................................
GSM Frequency Reuse 162
GSM.................................................................................................................................................
Frequency Reuse Maps 162
Page 7
4.3.5 .............................................................................................................................................
Scrambling Code Tuning 164
.................................................................................................................................................
Identifying Scrambling Code Conflicts 164
.................................................................................................................................................
Identifying Alternative Scrambling Codes 165
4.3.6 Antenna.............................................................................................................................................
Tuning 166
.................................................................................................................................................
Tuned Layer Calculation Assumptions 167
.................................................................................................................................................
Antenna Model Assumptions 167
4.3.7 Export to.............................................................................................................................................
ariesoACP 168
.................................................................................................................................................
GEO-ACP Project Directory Structure 168
.................................................................................................................................................
Antennas, Heights and Regions 168
.................................................................................................................................................
Launching the GEO-ACP Export Functionality 169
.................................................................................................................................................
The Project Settings page 170
.................................................................................................................................................
The Calculation Zone page 170
.................................................................................................................................................
The Focus Zone page 171
.................................................................................................................................................
The ARFCN page 171
.................................................................................................................................................
The Services page 172
.................................................................................................................................................
Exporting 173
Pathloss Generated Plots
......................................................................................................................... 173
The Network ......................................................................................................................... 173
Pathloss ......................................................................................................................... 174
.................................................................................................................................................
Backups When Updating Projects 174
4.3.8 .............................................................................................................................................
Advanced Diagnostics Module 176
The .................................................................................................................................................
AD Module User Interface 176
.................................................................................................................................................
Using the Advanced Diagnostics Module 177
.................................................................................................................................................
Investigation Reference 177
.................................................................................................................................................
Filtering AD Investigations 179
4.4 ................................................................................................................................... 180
Reporting
4.4.1 Using Templates............................................................................................................................................. 180
.................................................................................................................................................
Templates in the Data Explorer 181
.................................................................................................................................................
Creating Templates 181
.................................................................................................................................................
Opening Templates 182
4.4.2 ............................................................................................................................................. 182
Web Reporting
.................................................................................................................................................
Publishing Web Reports 183
Publishing a One-Off Web Report
......................................................................................................................... 183
Scheduling a Recurring Web Report
......................................................................................................................... 184
.................................................................................................................................................
Viewing Web Reports 184
Home Page ......................................................................................................................... 184
Timeline ......................................................................................................................... 185
Your Customers.........................................................................................................................
(VIPs) 186
......................................................................................................................... 188
VIP List Configuration
Reports ......................................................................................................................... 189
Report Page......................................................................................................................... 192
......................................................................................................................... 194
Email Subscriptions
Google Earth .........................................................................................................................
Reports 195
My Details ......................................................................................................................... 195
Administration ......................................................................................................................... 196
GeoMonitoring ......................................................................................................................... 198
4.5 ...................................................................................................................................
Correlation Module 198
4.5.1 Viewing .............................................................................................................................................
Cell Status on the Map 199
................................................................................................................................................. 199
CM Updates
................................................................................................................................................. 199
Alarms
4.5.2 Viewing .............................................................................................................................................
Details and Analyzing 200
Page 8
The .................................................................................................................................................
Correlation Module User Interface 201
.................................................................................................................................................
Analyzing Topics 202
.................................................................................................................................................
Correlation Analysis Reference 203
.................................................................................................................................................
Configuration Parameter Audit 204
5 Analysis Reference 205
5.1 ................................................................................................................................... 205

Analyses
5.1.1 Common.............................................................................................................................................
Analyses 205
................................................................................................................................................. 206
Administrative
Calls................................................................................................................................................. 206
.................................................................................................................................................
Device and Subscriber 207
................................................................................................................................................. 207
Network
................................................................................................................................................. 207
Performance
................................................................................................................................................. 207
Points
5.1.2 ............................................................................................................................................. 208
GSM Analyses
................................................................................................................................................. 209
Administrative
Busy.................................................................................................................................................
Hour 210
Call .................................................................................................................................................
Table 210
Calls................................................................................................................................................. 211
................................................................................................................................................. 211
Centroid
.................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................. 213
Failures
................................................................................................................................................. 213
Network
................................................................................................................................................. 213
Optimization
................................................................................................................................................. 214
Performance
................................................................................................................................................. 214
Points
RF ................................................................................................................................................. 215
................................................................................................................................................. 217
Roamers
.................................................................................................................................................
Subscriber and Cell 217
Time.................................................................................................................................................
Series 218
VIP ................................................................................................................................................. 218
5.1.3 ............................................................................................................................................. 219
UMTS Analyses
................................................................................................................................................. 220
Administrative
Busy.................................................................................................................................................
Hour 221
Call .................................................................................................................................................
Table 221
Calls................................................................................................................................................. 222
................................................................................................................................................. 222
Centroid
Data................................................................................................................................................. 222
.................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................. 225
Failures
Femto................................................................................................................................................. 226
................................................................................................................................................. 227
Network
................................................................................................................................................. 227
Optimization
................................................................................................................................................. 228
Performance
................................................................................................................................................. 229
Points
................................................................................................................................................. 229
Roamers
RF ................................................................................................................................................. 230
.................................................................................................................................................
Time.................................................................................................................................................
Series 232
VIP ................................................................................................................................................. 233
5.1.4 ............................................................................................................................................. 233
LTE Analyses
Page 9
................................................................................................................................................. 235
Administrative
Call .................................................................................................................................................
Table 235
.................................................................................................................................................
Connections 236
Data ................................................................................................................................................. 236
KPIs ................................................................................................................................................. 237
.................................................................................................................................................
Network 237
.................................................................................................................................................
Optimization 237
.................................................................................................................................................
Performance 238
.................................................................................................................................................
Points 238
.................................................................................................................................................
Reasons 239
RF ................................................................................................................................................. 239
.................................................................................................................................................
Usage................................................................................................................................................. 244
VoLTE................................................................................................................................................. 245
VIP ................................................................................................................................................. 246
5.1.5 WiFi Analyses ............................................................................................................................................. 246
................................................................................................................................... 247
5.2 Filters
5.2.1 Common.............................................................................................................................................
Filters 248
5.2.2 GSM Specific .............................................................................................................................................
Filters 250
5.2.3 UMTS Specific .............................................................................................................................................
Filters 250
5.2.4 LTE Specific .............................................................................................................................................
Filters 252
6 Data Import 253
6.1 ...................................................................................................................................
List Management 253
6.1.1 List Name .............................................................................................................................................
Management Window 253
6.1.2 Importing .............................................................................................................................................
New Lists 254
.................................................................................................................................................
Choose the Filter Type 255
.................................................................................................................................................
Choose the File to Import and Columns of Data 255
.................................................................................................................................................
Starting the Import 257
6.1.3 Editing Lists ............................................................................................................................................. 257
6.1.4 Exporting .............................................................................................................................................
Lists 257
...................................................................................................................................
6.2 Polygon Import 258
6.2.1 Select the .............................................................................................................................................
File to Import 258
6.2.2 Select the .............................................................................................................................................
Polygons to Import 258
6.2.3 Choose the .............................................................................................................................................
Folder to Save the Polygons 260
7 Glossary 261
Page 10
1 Introduction
GEOperformance enables operators to build an accurate and efficient network performance
monitoring and optimization framework, based on call trace inputs.
GEOperformance uses data collected by the radio network to show network performance as
subscribers experience it. You can view KPIs such as signal strength, drops and blocks, and traffic
volume by time, cell, service, and even precise geographic location, providing a powerful tool for
problem solving, optimization, and many other tasks.
GEOperformance is part of the market-leading suite of Arieso products, which also includes
ariesoACP (for automatic cell planning and optimization).
1.1 The need for ariesoGEO

It is common practice for mobile operators and service providers to consider switch data and drive
test measurements for network performance monitoring and optimization purposes. However
switch based performance management data is typically cell and not location/subscriber specific,
and drive tests constitute a costly activity that can only be conducted in streets, and at specific
times (often, in quiet network periods).
In other words, this information lacks precision and does not generally represent the actual state of
the network as witnessed by subscribers, and may lead to unnecessary expenditure or lack of action
and customer dissatisfaction.
GEOperformance is the network performance monitoring and optimization solution that addresses
these disadvantages by focusing on the actual subscriber experience where and when it occurs.
Using the data transmitted during mobile calls, and site-cell configuration information, the
GEOperformance geo-location engine can identify the spatial subscriber profile and network
performance characteristics quickly and accurately.
Measurement based ariesoGEO Data Traffic map
This information is stored in a database so that it can be used, along with the GEOperformance
outputs, for analysis purposes. GEOperformance does not rely on expensive (and relatively
uncommon) network/handset equipment such as probes or on mobile agents. Instead, it focuses on
the information transmitted by mobiles in the normal course of a voice/data call, and can process
and use millions of such measurement records.
The GEOperformance platform enables the detailed network analysis in real-time or historical
mode, based on high-resolution maps and comprehensive charts/tables for a diverse set of metrics.
These metrics may range from financial to technical (network and handset) Key Performance
Indicators. In these terms, GEOperformance can be used to analyze revenue and Return-On-
Page 11
Investment as well as interference and call drops.
1.2 What are ariesoGEO features today

Support for UMTS networks (Ericsson GPEH, NSN Geo-Interface,
Huawei Nastar and vendor agnostic), GSM networks (Ericsson RPMO
and Huawei Nastar) and LTE networks (GSM).
Automated support for 24/7 100% call data collection and network
configuration load
Advanced analyses allowing filtering per area/time/handset/

subscriber/cell/etc
Optimization features, such as problem identification, neighbor

planning, scrambling code tuning, antenna tuning and integration with
ariesoACP
Web reporting to distribute scheduled and ad-hoc reports
Detailed drill down into database tables and raw call data message
flow
Powerful data visualization capabilities in maps charts and tables
Proven carrier grade three tier ETL, data storage and application
architecture
1.3 What can be done with ariesoGEO

GEOperformance is the mobile network performance monitoring and optimization solution that
enables the user to carry out:
New Site Integration Tests
Offender Site/Cell Prioritization
Cluster Optimization
Automated Cluster Optimization
Candidate Selection
RNC Re-homing
Problem Call Troubleshooting
Device Analysis
Subscriber Analysis
1.4 Where the data comes from

GEOperformance makes use of call related data that is recorded in/by the network equipment,
typically at the level of BSCs and RNCs. This type of information differs by equipment vendor. For
example:
Page 12
Ericsson use GPEH (General Performance Event Handing) for their UMTS equipment and RPMO
(Real time Performance MOnitoring) for their GSM equipment
NSN provide access to data across the GEO-Interface of their L3 Data collector/RNC Data
Mediator solution, sometimes known as Megamon and EMIL
Huawei support traces generated into CHR and MR files by Nastar for both UMTS and GSM
infrastructure
More information on these measurement records can be found in the equipment vendor literature.
With various types of mobile records to consider, the GEOperformance input data format has been
developed to be technology and vendor agnostic. This means that data for different technologies,
different equipment vendors, or different versions of the same equipment can be displayed and
investigated in exactly the same way (although care should be taking when directly comparing data
from different sources).
Due to the truly agnostic nature of its input data format, GEOperformance is therefore able not
only to interface with many equipment types today, but also extend its support to new
technologies/vendors and upgrade to new equipment versions in a quick and efficient manner. To
this end Arieso has been working on building technical partnerships with many of the major
equipment vendors.
Although GEOperformance is technology agnostic, it will not ignore additional data that may be
provided by specific equipment types.
Detailed instructions on how to consider and use call related measurements with GEOperformance
is provided to customers as part of the GEOperformance package. If the package did not include
these instructions or for the most up-to-date related documentation, please contact the Arieso
Support team.
1.5 Analysing the data

Standard analyses provide a complete library of functions that allows the intelligence within
GEOperformance to be analysed and visualised in a way that enables a wide range of key use cases
across performance engineering. This library has been developed over multiple product releases
through our experience of working with over 50 networks around the world to deliver the
functionality engineers need. The standard analyses available within GEOperformance are
described in the Analysis Reference.
Custom Analyses build on the unique GEOperformance application architecture to rapidly deliver
fully tailored analyses and visualization without code changes. They extend the standard library to
enable network specific variations of workflow and KPIs, and well as enabling customer-specific
analyses and workflows. All licensed Custom Analyses produced by the JDSU Professional Services
team are Quality Assured and optimized for performance.
Page 13
1.6 Sensitive Personal Information
The IMSI and IMEI information is encrypted within the GEOperformance database (by default). A
standard GEOperformance user will see these fields within the product in an encrypted format
(referred to as a pseudo-IMSI/IMEI). Users with "privileged" access will view these fields in an
unencrypted format. Refer to your GEOperformance administrator for details regarding roles to
which you have been assigned.
Where a user views unencrypted IMSI/IMEI data there may be a warning banner stating that
"sensitive personal information" is being viewed. The actual banner warning text is configurable via
the GEOperformance admin console.
ariesoGEO indicating Sensitive Personal Information is on display
1.7 Further Information

Documentation
Help: From within the product, click on the Help menu option or press F1 to launch the
GEOperformance help.
User Guide: The GEOperformance User Guide provides the same information as the online help,
but in a printable PDF format. You can open the User Guide from the Start menu, in the Arieso
program folder.
Release Guide: The GEOperformance Release Guide provides information on new features and
fixed issues. For a copy of the GEOperformance Release Guide, contact your Arieso
representative.
Technical Guide: The GEOperformance Technical Guide provides detailed information about the
standard set of analyses, such as the data sources they run against and the metrics they show, as
well as an introduction to the basics of the Arieso call model. For a copy of the GEOperformance
Technical Guide, contact your Arieso representative.
Training
Training can be provided at a number of levels, from basic user training to server administration
training. For information on the pricing and availability of GEOperformance training courses,
contact your Arieso representative.
Page 14
1.7.1 Support
Use http://www.arieso.com/login.php to log on to the Arieso Client Services Support portal. Access
to this portal is limited to the Arieso customers. By using the portal, it is possible to log and edit
cases, examine their progress as well as communicate with the Arieso Support team. Detailed
instructions on how to use the portal are provided to customers as part of the GEOperformance
package.
If a username and password has not been assigned for the portal or portal instructions are not
clear, please email support@arieso.com.
To call the Support team, use the following Support telephone numbers:
Europe, Middle East and Africa +44 (0) 1635 232475
Americas +1 877 274 3761 (+1 877 ARIESO1)
There is a range of support and maintenance services provided for GEOperformance, and
customers can consider a standard offering as well as a number of additional options to build the
right solution for their operational and business needs.
For more details, please contact Arieso (www.arieso.com).
1.8 Related Services

Talk to Arieso for help with:
Training
The expert trainers from the Arieso Services team offer comprehensive training courses. These
courses focus on how to use the Arieso software products in the best possible fashion, but have
also covered applied network planning and optimization topics in the past.
Mentoring
Expert users from the Arieso Services team provide on site mentoring services to provide smooth
introduction of GEOperformance. Mentoring focuses on informal user coaching and development
of customized templates as a part of process integration.
Custom Analysis Development
Expert users from the Arieso Services team developing customized analyses based upon
GEOperformance data sets.
Consulting
The consultants of the Services team combine many man-years of experience with the power of the
software products. The Arieso consultants have been involved in complex projects of diverse
nature, including network optimization, network design and network sharing.
For more details, please contact Arieso (www.arieso.com).
Page 15
2 Getting Started
This section explains the basics of how to use GEOperformance to run analyses.
More information on getting the most out of analyses can be found in the Working with Analyses
chapter.
Information on using the optimization modules and combining analysis results can be found in the
Advanced Features chapter.
2.1 Logging in to ariesoGEO

Open GEOperformance by clicking Start>All Programs>Arieso>GEOperformance, or by using the
GEOperformance icon on your desktop.
Normally GEOperformance uses your Windows login details to identify and authenticate your
account, and then opens the GEOperformance user interface.
If the Log In dialog appears, enter your user name and password. If multiple GEO Areas are available
in the database, you will also need to select a GEO Area to work in.
ariesoGEO log in dialog
2.2 Running Analyses

The individual analysis is the fundamental building block at the heart of all of GEOperformance's
sophisticated network and performance insight capabilities.
In order to run an analysis:
1. Drag a control (such as Table or Chart) onto the canvas. This determines how the analysis is
displayed. For more information on controls, see Control Toolbox.
2. Drag the analysis onto the control. Descriptions of the standard GEOperformance analyses can
be found in Analyses. Most analyses can only be displayed in certain formats.
3. Restrict the data to be analyzed (such as to a specific location or time period) using the triangular
filter icon. Some analyses will run without filtering, but others require filtering in order to run.
These analyses will prompt you to select one or more filters. For more information on setting up
filters, see Using Filters. The filters available are described in Filters.
Note: To apply an existing filter to a new analysis, drag the filter icon from the existing analysis to
the new one.
Your system may also provide custom analyses tailored to your company's specific needs. For
information on these, contact your GEOperformance administrator.
Page 16
2.2.1 Analysis Icons
Analysis Types
Every analysis is represented by an icon in the Data Explorer that indicates which controls it is
compatible with. The icon appears as a green circle with colored bars. The bars carry the following
meaning:
Solid Blue bar - a Map analysis; creates a layer of data that is displayable in a Map Control
Dashed Blue bar - a Map multi-analysis; creates several layers of data that are displayable in a
Map Control
Solid Red bar - a Table analysis; creates a block of data displayable in a Table Control
Solid Green bar - a Chart analysis; creates a block of data displayable in a Chart Control
If an analysis is dragged onto an incompatible Control, an Error dialog will be displayed:
Analysis not suitable dialog
Analysis Status
Every active Analysis has an Analysis Status icon, visible within the control that the Analysis resides,
but also below the Control toolbox.
The generic circular icon has a number of variants to signify different statuses:
Analysis has run and returned valid data.
Analysis has been run, a new valid filter has been applied.
Analysis has been run, a new filter has been applied with filter types that are being ignored.
Analysis has been run, but a new filter has been applied and mandatory filter types must be
configured before being run.
Analysis has run and returned no data.
Analysis has not been run
Analysis has not been run, a new valid filter has been applied.
Analysis has not been run, a new filter has been applied with filter types that are being
ignored.
Analysis has not been run, a new filter has been applied and mandatory filter types must be
configured before being run.
Analysis is in process of running.
Page 17
Analysis is in the queue to be run.
Analysis is in the queue to be run but has mandatory filter types which must be configured
before being run.
An error has occurred while attempting to run the analysis.
Analysis Technology
Analysis is Common across technologies.
Analysis is for GSM/GPRS.
Analysis is for LTE.
Analysis is for UMTS.
2.2.2 Analysis Parameters

Some analyses have Parameters that can be used to specify thresholds, margins or other properties
that affect the analysis results. Analyses that can be tailored using parameters display a parameter
icon in the footer:
Parameter icon
To set a value for the parameter, double-click the Parameter icon. The Parameter Editor dialog
opens:
Parameter Editor dialog
Click on the value to set it, either manually or by selecting a value from a drop-down list.
2.2.3 Recalculating Analyses

To recalculate an individual analysis, double-click on its status icon.
Note: If the analysis filter or parameters have not been changed since the analysis was last run,
GEOperformance will retrieve the last results instead of performing a full recalculation. To force the
analysis to recalculate with the latest data, right-click on the status icon and choose Force Calculation
of Analysis.
Page 18
Analysis right mouse menu options
To recalculate all analyses on the canvas, use the Calculate All button on the Canvas ribbon.
To cancel calculation of an analysis (for example, if the filters have not been set correctly and so
calculation would take a very long time), right-click on the status icon and choose Cancel Analysis.
2.3 Working in ariesoGEO

At its most basic level, the GEOperformance user interface consists of the following:
Presentation Canvas: This acts as a user workspace. Controls and analyses are dragged onto the
canvas to provide insights into network performance, and the set of analyses shown on the
canvas can be saved for future use.
Control Toolbox: This contains controls that can be dragged onto the canvas to determine the
format of analyses.
Data Explorer: This is a set of folders containing items that can be dragged onto the canvas, such
as Analyses, Filters and Color Schemes.
There is also a message log at the bottom of the window that shows technical information such as
analysis errors.
Page 19
2.3.1 Presentation Canvas
The presentation canvas is the part of the GEOperformance user interface in which you display and
work with analyses.
The presentation canvas
You can work with multiple presentation canvases at once. Each separate canvas will be displayed
as a new tab. To create a new canvas, click on the Presentation Canvas button on the Home menu:
Presentation Canvas button
The set of open canvases in the GEOperformance window make up a Document. Documents can be
saved to your computer for future use.
Control Taskbar
The Presentation Canvas includes a Control taskbar that lists the Controls open in the canvas.
Click on a control's entry to bring it to the front of the Canvas, or right-click it to minimize, maximize
or close the control. If there are many Controls on the Canvas, use the arrows to the left of the
taskbar to scroll through the list.
ariesoGEO Control taskbar
Changing Display Properties

To change the properties of a control on the canvas, right-click on the title bar or click the
Properties icon on the Home Ribbon.
Page 20
Right-clicking in the title bar to open control properties
The display properties you can change depend on the type of the control. All controls enable you to
change their position, size and title, but for example Chart controls have extra options such as chart
type and label size, whereas Map controls have options for showing and hiding the layer and status
panes.
Typical properties for a Table control
To change a property, click on the value. Some properties can be edited manually (such as the size)
whereas for others you must choose a value from a drop-down list.
Resizing, Moving and Deleting Controls

To resize a control, click one of the selection handles (the blue circles and squares that appear when
a control is selected) and drag it until the control is the desired size.
A control with buttons and selection handles
To move a control, click on the title bar and drag it to the desired position.
Tip: You can resize or move multiple controls at the same time by holding down CTRL or SHIFT when
Page 21
you select each one. When you resize or move one of the selected controls, all the others will also
change.
To maximize, minimize or delete (close) a control, use the round buttons at top right.
To make all the controls on the presentation canvas appear larger or smaller, use the zoom at the
bottom right of the GEOperformance window.
Message Log
The Message Log provides information about the application's current status as well as errors and
warnings. It is normally shown at the bottom of the application window.
ariesoGEO Message Log dialog
If the message log is not visible, click the Message Log button on the Home ribbon to open it:
GEOperformance Message Log button
2.3.2 Control Toolbox

A Control toolbox is displayed on the left-hand side of the presentation canvas. It contains a set of
Controls for placing items onto the canvas area:
The Control Toolbox
Drag and drop controls onto the Presentation Canvas area to create a new instance of each item.
Hide one or more of these Control options by left-clicking on the grey header area just above the
respective icon. There are five types of Control available:
Map: Displays rasters and points on a Bing Virtual Earth backdrop.
Legend: Displays a color scheme on the canvas. For example, if the same color scheme were
used in several different map analyses, it might be useful to be able to refer to it to check what
the analyses indicated.
Table: Displays tables of data.
Page 22
Chart: Displays a line chart of the data. This can be changed in the analysis properties to other
common chart types such as bar charts or pie charts.
Textbox: Displays text on the canvas.
Most analyses only work with specific controls. If the analysis is not compatible with the control it is
dragged onto, it will display an error. The controls that an analysis is compatible with are indicated
by the analysis icon. For more information see Data Explorer Conventions.
Map Control
Map Controls are used to show geographic data in GEOperformance. To run a map analysis, drag it
from the Data Explorer onto a map control. To create a new Map control, drag the Map icon from
the Control toolbox to the Presentation Canvas.
Map analyses are denoted by a blue bar at the left of the Analysis icon. An icon that shows a dotted
blue bar indicates an analysis that will produce multiple layers in the map control.
You can show multiple analyses in a single map control. Each analysis layer will overlay the one
below.
Map control, showing multiple analysis layers. The circles on the UMTS layer overlay the triangles on the GSM layer.
Tip: To save a specific map view, create a polygon around the edge of the view and save the
polygon. To open the map to the saved view, drag the saved polygon onto the map, right-click on it,
and select Zoom to layer extents.
For information on understanding map symbols, finding a specific map location, managing map
layers, using a spider to show selected cells, and other map features, see Working with Maps.
Page 23
Chart Control
Chart Controls are used to view results of selected Analyses in graphical or chart forms on a
Presentation Canvas. They present data in column, bar, line, pie and other chart styles according to
desired visual effect. The user can drag a new Chart control directly on to a Canvas, and then drag an
analysis onto the Chart control. Chart analyses are indicated by a green bar on the Analysis icon.
To change chart properties such as type, font size, or the space available for the X and Y axis labels
(margins), right-click on the chart title and choose Properties to open the Chart Properties dialog:
Chart Properties control
Legend Control
Legend Controls are used to display color schemes and/or filter schemes that have been applied to
items on Map Controls and Chart Controls.
Legend showing color scheme and filter
You can drag a new Legend Control from the Control toolbox on to the Presentation Canvas, and
then drag any Analysis Color Scheme or Filter onto the Legend to view its current settings.
You can also check the color scheme used for a map analysis by mousing over the color wheel icon
at the right end of each analysis layer.
Page 24
Color wheel icon and Color Scheme tooltip
Table Control
The table control presents data in a familiar table format.
Unlike other controls, you can display an analysis in a table by dragging the analysis directly onto the
canvas, rather than onto the control.
The table control enables users to re-order data, hide unwanted columns, and freeze important
columns to ensure they remain visible during horizontal scrolling. Right-click on any column heading
to access these features. For more information, see Working with Tables.
Textbox Control
Textbox Controls are used to add annotations to a Presentation Canvas, to improve the readability
and comprehension of the display. The user can drag a Textbox control from the Control toolbox
onto a Presentation Canvas, and enter any text required.
ariesoGEO Textbox Control
You can change Textbox control characteristics such as font size by right-clicking on the title bar and
selecting Properties.
Textbox control properties
Page 25
2.3.3 Data Explorer
The Data Explorer dialog provides access to Analyses, Filters, Schemes Layer 3 Layouts and Network
Themes. Click on the Data Explorer button on the Home ribbon to open the Data Explorer pane.
The Data Explorer
The Data Explorer normally contains two different types of folders, Global and Local. View the
contents of the different storage areas by clicking on the ‘Global’ and ‘Local’ tabs in the Data
Explorer window:
Global
Data in the Global storage area is visible to all users of the system
Local
Data in the Local storage area is visible only to you and is stored in your local storage area. Other
users of the system cannot see this data, so use the Local storage area to store personal data that is
not to be shared with others.
Note: If Analyses are saved to the Local area on the PC and are used in a presentation canvas, that
presentation canvas will not be accessible to other users.
Additional tabs
Some licensed features use Data Explorer tabs to store results or other information. If your
installation includes these features, additional tabs will be shown at the top of the Data Explorer
pane. Details of what is stored in these additional tabs, and how they should be used, can be found
in the sections describing the individual features.
Data Explorer Icons

The Data Explorer uses icons rather than file extensions to identify different data types. It is
possible for files in the same folder to have the same name but different types, in which case their
icons will be different.
Icon File Type
Filters.
Network Themes.
Page 26
Icon File Type
Templates.
L3 Layouts.
Color Schemes.
Analyses. The analysis icon indicates the controls that

that analysis is compatible with:
Map ( indicates that the map has multiple layers)
Table
Chart
Most analyses are compatible with multiple controls, and
so most analysis icons will show multiple bars.
Analyses
The Data Explorer separates analyses into different folders depending on their technology. For
example, analyses that can be run on data from all technologies can be found in the Analyses
(Common) folder. For more information, see Analyses.
Color Schemes
GEOperformance contains many pre-configured Color Schemes that can be used to color rasters,
vectors and charts. These Color Schemes are accessible from the Data Explorer under the Color
Schemes folder. Simply drag these Color Schemes onto an Analysis on a Presentation Canvas, and it
will color the object accordingly. A pre-configured Color Scheme can be edited to form custom
schemes by dragging onto the Color Scheme Editor. For simplicity, the Color Schemes are contained
in several folders which are descriptive of their purpose.
GEOperformance Data Explorer Color Schemes folders
Page 27
Filters
GEOperformance contains many pre-configured Filters that can be used to filter Analyses. These
Filters are accessible from the Data Explorer under the Filters folder. Simply drag these Filters onto
the appropriate Analyses, and they will be applied automatically. Pre-configured Filters can be
edited to form custom filters by dragging onto the Filter Editor.
GEOperformance Data Explorer Filters
Note: After a Filter is applied an analysis must be re-calculated.
Call Drilldown Layouts

Layer 3 Layouts in GEOperformance contain a default configuration of charts for L3 Drilldown.
There is only one default Layout for each RF technology:
GEOperformance Data Explorer Layer 3 Layouts
Page 28
Network Themes
Network Themes are used to color the cell symbols shown on a Map Control according to specific
cell properties. For example, you could color UMTS cell symbols by LAC to see at a glance which
location area each cell was assigned to.
To color cells according to a specific Network Theme, drag the theme from the Data Explorer onto
a site or cell. The network layer will be updated with an additional checkbox that you can use to
show or hide the specified Network Theme. Hover over the Network Theme icon beside the
checkbox in order to see the key.
The contains several pre-configured Network Themes that can be used to color the cell symbols
shown on Map Controls. Simply drag these Network Themes onto the appropriate icon of a
Network Layer in the Map Control and it will color the objects accordingly.
An example of using a Network Theme to color cells by RNC
To see which network themes are available for each technology, look in the Network Themes folder
in the Data Explorer.
Local Folders
Local folders in the Data Explorer allow a user to set up a convenient or otherwise customized
directory structure of items such as Analyses and Color Schemes. Items can be copied to and from
the Global folders as required. Right-clicking on a folder will show the following context menu,
which allows for Windows-style manipulation of the folders and their contents:
Local folders right mouse menu
Rename folders and files in-place, by selecting the item and pressing F2, or selecting it then clicking
on it again (like in Windows Explorer), or by selecting Rename from the pop-up menu:
Page 29
Renaming Local Folders
Tip: Copy and paste keyboard shortcuts are implemented for Data Explorer Items. Selecting an item
and pressing CTRL-C, or choosing Copy from the right-click popup menu, will copy a reference to the
item to the clipboard. Selecting another folder or file and pressing CTRL-V or choosing Paste from
the right-click popup menu, will paste the file/folder.
Tip: The user can also move and copy files and folders around the Data Explorer by dragging and
dropping them. By default, dragging and dropping an item will move it. Press CTRL at the same time
as dragging to copy the item.
2.3.4 Menus and Toolbars

The GEOperformance ribbons provide many useful options for working with analyses or using
advanced features. This section describes the options available.
Home Ribbon Menu: Commonly used editors and tools
Canvas Ribbon Menu: Options for working with the analyses on the canvas
Optimization Ribbon Menu: Access to RF Optimization modules, if licensed
Help Ribbon Menu: Information about GEOperformance
GEOperformance Quick Access Toolbar: Add favorite features and commands to this toolbar for
easy access
Home Ribbon Menu

The GEOperformance Home ribbon contains contains shortcuts to commonly used editors and tools
within GEOperformance.
ariesoGEO Home ribbon
Page 30
Presentation Canvas: Opens a new Presentation Canvas tab
Data Explorer: Opens the Data Explorer in a new window
Message Log: Toggles the visibility of the Message Log. If the log is currently visible, this button
will hide it
Properties: Displays the properties of the currently selected object. These can then be edited
Color Scheme Editor: Creates a Color Scheme to apply to an analysis
Variables Editor: Enables you to edit Variables
Filter Editor: Enables you to create a Filter. This filter is not applied to any analyses by default,
but it can be dragged to specific analyses or saved to the local tab of the Data Explorer
Grid Calculator: Enables you to perform calculations on raster analyses and output the result as a
new raster map. For example, you could subtract one raster analysis from another
Network Search: Opens the Network Search dialog that enables you to find sites and cells based
on details such as name, frequency or scrambling code
Edit Document Filter: Enables you to edit the document filter. Settings in the document filter are
inherited by the filters set for the canvas and for individual analyses
Manage List Names: Enables you to import and export lists of values. Lists are used when a
specific set of individual values (such as a group of subscribers belonging to a single corporate
client) is often required in a filter
Import Polygons: Enables you to create GEOperformance Polygons from vector files such as
MapInfo polygons, so that you can use them for geographical filtering
Schedule Report: Schedules one or more analyses (as saved in a Template) to be run at the times
specified
Publish To Web: Publish the current canvas to Web Reporting.
Canvas Ribbon Menu

The GEOperformance Canvas ribbon contains options for working with the analyses on the canvas:
ariesoGEO Canvas ribbon
Calculate All: Recalculate all the analyses in the current document or canvas. If any analyses
have already been calculated, the cached results will be used
Force Calculate All: Recalculate all the analyses in the current document or canvas. If any
analyses have already been calculated, they will be calculated again based on the current data
Calculate Out of Date: Recalculate all the analyses in the current document or canvas where the
filter has changed since they were last calculated
Stop Running Analyses: Cancel all calculations in the current document or canvas
Restrict to Map Area: Restricts all the analyses in the current canvas to the area shown in the
active map control. You can also drag the map bounds icon (at bottom right of the map control)
onto a filter to restrict an analysis to that area
Enable Running of Analyses: Prevents GEOperformance calculating any analyses. This is useful
when working with analyses that run instantly when dragged onto the canvas. If you disable
Page 31
analysis running, you can drag analyses onto the canvas and set up filters without interruption.
When all analyses are ready, you can then check the Enable Running of Analyses option again to
enable them to calculate
Refresh Values: Updates the values used by Filters. This is useful if new values may have become
available since the filters were set up
Save to File: Save the current canvas as an GEOperformance Document
Open from File: Open a previously saved Document
Arrange: Provides a number of layout options for the analyses on the current canvas
Active Canvas (Snapshot): Saves the current canvas as a PNG image
All Canvases (Snapshot): Saves every open canvas as a separate PNG image
Optimization Ribbon Menu

The GEOperformance Optimization ribbon is only available if one or more optimization modules are
licensed for your installation. It provides access to a set of features that assist with RF
Optimization.
ariesoGEO Optimization ribbon
Export to ariesoACP: Exports geo-located traffic and RF measurement data to the separate
ariesoACP product for use in cell planning.
Neighbor Planning: A module that provides automated Neighbor Planning.
Identify Problems: A module that identifies areas in the network with below threshold KPI
performance.
Help Ribbon Menu

The GEOperformance Help ribbon contains options that provide information about
GEOperformance.
ariesoGEO Help ribbon
Help: Opens the Help file. This information is also available in PDF format. To see it, click your
computer's Start button and navigate to Arieso > GEOperformance > User Reference Guide
Arieso Website: Opens a browser window to http://www.arieso.com, where you can find the
latest product news, press releases and contact information
About: Provides information about the product version and licenses. The full software version
number is necessary when contacting the Arieso Support team or logging a case via the Arieso
Customer portal. The licenses available on your system determine whether you can use some
functions, such as VIP Reporting or Neighbor Planning. To see which licenses are installed, click
License Info
Page 32
ariesoGEO Quick Access Toolbar
ariesoGEO Quick Access toolbar, located above menu bar
The Quick Access toolbar above the ribbon provides quick access to the most commonly used
features of GEOperformance. To add a feature to this toolbar, right-click on the icon to add and
select Add to Quick Access Toolbar.
2.4 Using Filters

Most analyses use filters to restrict them to a specific subset of the data, such as a specific specific
service, cell, or geographic area. Without filters, some analyses can return a very large number of
results, which takes a long time and can slow down the system.
Multiple filters can be combined to restrict the data further. For example, if you set filters for a
specific service and a specific cell, the analysis would include only data for calls that used that
service and were connected to that cell.
The filter icon is an inverted triangle. If no filters are set, it is colored gray. If one or more filters
are set, the filter icon is dark blue.
Filter icon: no filters set Filter icon: filters set
Note: The number in the icon does not refer to the number of filters set
Applying filters
You can set filters by clicking on the analysis filter icon, or by clicking on the Filter Editor button on
the Home ribbon.
GEOperformance Filter Editor button
When a filter is set by clicking on an analysis filter icon, it is applied to that analysis. When a filter is
set by clicking on the Filter Editor button on the Home ribbon, it is not automatically applied to any
analysis. It can be applied to an analysis by dragging the filter icon at bottom left, or it can be saved
to the Data Explorer using the Save button at bottom left.
To apply a filter to an analysis:
Page 33
1. Double-click on the filter icon on the map control. The Filter Editor opens.
Filter Editor showing common filter types
Note: Most analyses use only some of the possible filters. Filters that are not available for the
chosen analysis will be hidden.
2. Click the Add button for the filter to use. The Add Values dialog opens
3. Add the values to filter by. For more information see Adding Values and Geographical Filtering
4. Click Apply as New. Alternatively, you can save the filter to the Data Explorer by clicking on the
Save button at bottom left
A single filter can be applied to multiple analyses. To apply an existing filter to another analysis,
drag the filter icon from the Data Explorer, or from the original analysis, to the filter icon on the
new analysis. The filter icon on the new analysis will turn dark blue.
Filters are numbered sequentially based on the order in which they were created. Filters with the
same number are identical.
To update all filters that have the same number:
1. Open one of the filters and edit it
2. When finished, click Apply to All
Clicking Apply to All updates all filters that have the same number. If you click Apply as New when
editing a multiple filter, you will create a new filter with a new number that applies only to the
current analysis. You can reapply it to the other analyses by dragging the icon onto the relevant
controls.
2.4.1 Geographical Filtering

The easiest way to set up a geographical filter is to use the Map control. You can drag the bounds
of the current map onto the Filter Editor, or you can use the map to draw a shape around a specific
area of interest (this is called a Polygon) and drag the polygon onto the Filter Editor.
To use the map bounds as a filter
Page 34
1. Navigate to the area of interest, either by zooming and panning or by using the zoom to area
button on the map control toolbar
2. Open the relevant Filter Editor
3. Drag the map bounds icon (found on the bottom right-hand corner of the map control) onto any
part of the Filter Editor
Filtering - Bounding Box
4. Click Apply as New to apply only to the current filter, or Apply to All to apply to all filters with the
same number
You can also set the current map area as a document-level filter by right-clicking on the map control
and selecting Set current map bounds as a default for running analyses.
Map control right-click menu
If you want the canvas-level filter to always reflect the current map bounds, check the Restrict to
Map Area checkbox in the Canvas ribbon:
Restrict to Map Area option from the Canvas ribbon
When this box is checked, the geographical area that is selected in the canvas filter will change
Page 35
every time the map bounds change.
Page 36
2.4.2 Polygon Filtering
You can set the geographical filter to a non-rectangular area by drawing a polygon on the map.
To use polygon filtering:
1. Draw a polygon on the map using the polygon tool: The completed polygon will be shown as
a map layer. For more detailed information, see Drawing Polygons
2. Drag one or more polygon layers onto the Filter Editor
Filtering - Multiple Polygons
Note: Analyses will perform faster if filtered by a bounding box. The user should use polygons
sparingly and attempt to keep the area covered by polygons as small as possible.
Filtering - Multiple Polygons Results
You can also drag saved polygons from the Data Explorer directly onto the Filter Editor. For more
information on saving polygons, see Drawing Polygons.
Page 37
Import Polygons
The Polygon Import wizard is used to import sets of polygons to GEOperformance which can be
used for filtering and display. To launch the Polygon Import wizard click on the Import Polygons
button from the Home ribbon:
GEOperformance Import Polygons button
ariesoGEO Import Polygons dialog
Tip: Right-click on the Import Polygons button in the Home tab, to add its shortcut to the Quick
Access Toolbar.
2.4.3 Adding Filter Values

The first three filter types (Time Period, Geographic Area and Day Hour Settings) offer specific
controls to set or select conditions. Click on the filter type to expand it and edit these.
Filter dialog expanded to show Day/Hour options
Other filter types are invoked by specifying or selecting from a list of values that the particular field
may hold. To see or edit these, click the Add... button beside the filter name.
Page 38
Clicking Add opens the Add Values dialog. From here you can search for and add items:
Add Values dialog
Searching for values

Within the Add Values dialog it is possible to search for a term, by default checking if the string is
contained in one of the listed filter values. Four search options exist:
Begins With
Contains
Ends With
Does Not Contain
Values in the left hand pane can be added to the filter using the Add button, or existing filter values
can be removed using the Remove button. Items can be manually added by using the Add Filter text
entry box. Options exits to use variables, covered in more detail in later sections. Finally it is
possible to specify that the filter should be considered as a negative filter
Note: A maximum of 50 filter values can be added.
Note: Advanced users can use regular expressions in the Filter Editor. The user can also create filters
to identify roamers with conventional wildcards "*". Regular expressions in Filters, enclosing the
expression in curly brackets "{" and "}" can be found. Guides on the use of regular expressions are
widely available, typical operators required within GEOperformance include:
^ Start of line
. Single character wildcard
* Previous character repeated
$ End of line
Character not any of the characters enclosed within

[]
square brackets
Save the Filter by using the Save icon at the bottom-left corner of the Filter Editor. The user can also
drag the triangular Filter icon on to Analysis items of interest (map, chart or table).
All the saved filters can be accessed from the Data Explorer.
Page 39
Tip: GEOperformance provides some pre-configured filters by default; these filters can be found
under the Filters folder in the Global storage area of the Data Explorer.
2.4.4 Filter Hierarchy

Filters can be set at multiple levels within GEOperformance. These act as a hierarchy, in which each
filter inherits the properties of the filter above.
GEOperformance analysis If no other filters are set, analyses are
options filtered according to the Time Period
and Geographic Area set in in the
GEOperformance options. To set the
analysis options, click File > Options.
Document filter A Document filter applies to all the

presentation canvases in that
document. It inherits the Time Period
and Geographic Area set in the
GEOperformance analysis options, and
inherits its Day Hour settings from the
Document Day Hour settings Variable
(the default is all days and hours). To
set a document filter, click Edit
Document Filter on the Home ribbon.
Canvas filter A Canvas filter applies to a single
presentation canvas. It inherits any
properties set in the Document filter.
To set a canvas filter, click on the filter
icon next to the canvas name in the
canvas tab.
Analysis filter An Analysis filter applies to a single

presentation canvas. It inherits any
properties set in the Canvas filter. To
set an analysis filter, click on the filter
icon at the bottom right of the analysis
control.
Editing a filter does not break the inheritance link. The filter will continue to inherit any properties
that have not been changed.
For example, an analysis filter inherits the Time Period, Geographical Area and Day Hour Settings
from the canvas filter. If it is later set to use a different Geographic Area and Time Period, it will
continue to inherit its Day Hour Settings.
Page 40
Filter Editor showing a mix of inherited and
non-inherited filter values
Displaying a list of applied filter values

Hover the mouse over a filter icon to display a list of all the filters (local and inherited) that will be
applied by that filter.
Local filter items (those that are applied to the filter being hovering over) have a blue background.
Inherited filter items have a lighter background along with an indication of which filter they were
inherited from.
2.5 Finding Sites and Cells

Use Network Search to find cells or sites with the specified location or network parameter (such as
frequency, lat long, and technology specific identifiers such as Scrambling Code and BASIC). You can
then display the selected cells in the map.
2.5.1 Network Search dialog

To search for a Cell or Site:
1. Either click the Network Search button on the Home Ribbon Menu, or right-click on a Map and
select Search for sites and cells from this location.
Network Search button
2. Select the appropriate tab (GSM Cells, UMTS Cells, LTE Cells or Sites)
3. Select a field to search by, such as Label, Site, Distance, or Antenna Name
4. Enter the search string or value. The results update as you type
5. Click on the desired site or cell to select it
6. Click Highlight in Map to change the icon representing the selected site or cell to red, or click
Bring into view in Map to center the map on the selection
If you have the Correlation Module licensed, you can also click on Correlate to view information for
that cell in the Correlation Module. Select multiple cells to open multiple tabs.
Page 41
Network Search: selected cell highlighted in map
Search Options
By default, Network Search searches for fields that contain the selected text. Click on the icon to
the right of the search box to see other options.
Network Search dialog - search options
To sort the list, or select the columns to show, right-click on the column headers.
To show the distance from a specific location, click Show distance from lat/lon location and enter a
location. If the Network Search was launched from a Map control, this location is automatically set
to the center of the visible map.
2.6 Saving Documents

To save or open an GEOperformance document (a set of presentation canvases), or create a new
one, click on the green File menu at the top left of GEOperformance and select the appropriate
option (New, Open, Save, Save As, or Close).
All File menu items follow standard windows conventions.
2.6.1 ariesoGEO Document Types

There are three different document types in GEOperformance:
GEOperformance Document (file extension .geo)
This is a Presentation Canvas, or set of canvases, containing analyses and other controls. The
analyses, filters and other parameters are saved, but the results are not. When the document is
opened, the analyses will be recalculated.
To save only the current canvas, use the Save to File button on the Canvas Ribbon.
Page 42
Note: Spiders and Layer3 layers are considered part of the analysis results, and will not be saved.
GEOperformance Template (file extension .geot)
This is a document that has been saved as a template. Saving as a template allows the person
opening the template to use different values for some of the Variables set, such as the Document
Bounds or the Time Period.
Tip: Templates can be set up centrally and shared throughout the company.
GEOperformance Report (file extension .geor)
This is a document that saves the results of running all the analyses and does not require any further
calculation. It is intended to be read-only once it is saved, but once opened it can be saved as a
standard document and the analyses modified and rerun. Doing this does not affect the results in
the saved report.
2.6.2 Saving the Canvas as an Image

As well as saving a canvas as a document or template for other GEOperformance users, you can
save it as an image file (snapshot). This is particularly useful for sending to colleagues without
access to GEOperformance, or inserting into reports and presentations.
GEOperformance Canvas Snapshot options
To save a canvas as an image file, use the Snapshot tools on the Canvas ribbon. This saves the
current state of the selected canvas as a PNG.
Using the All Canvases button will save a separate PNG for each canvas.
2.7 Changing ariesoGEO Configuration

The GEOperformance configuration, application and (default) analysis running related options are
controlled via the Options dialog. This is accessed from the File menu, and then selecting the
Options item.
There are currently 12 different sets of options, organized in 4 categories:
Application
Containing details of the GEO Area, Application Startup options, the GEOperformance Directory
Structure, and Correlation Module configuration (if licensed for your installation).
Running Analyses
Containing details of default Document Filter such as the Time Period, Geographical Area, Other
Parameters such as filter confidence and options associated with Analysis Results.
Page 43
Presentation Canvases
Containing details of defaults for Map Controls, Visible Columns and Layer 3 Drill-Down.
Details of each page follow. Depending on the licenses you have installed, some of the categories
may not be available.
Note: Some of the features described in the Options dialog are mostly applicable to Administrator
users, and are therefore not expected to be accessible for or modified by the typical
GEOperformance user. for more details, please contact the local Administrator or the Arieso Support
team.
The Options dialog can be closed by electing to Save Settings (saving changed settings), or Cancel.
2.7.1 GEO Area

This page of the Options control shows details of the GEO Area currently being used, such as the
projection system and timezone.
2.7.2 Application Startup

This page of the Options control determines what is visible by default in the GEOperformance
workspace.
Show Presentation Canvas: Whether the Presentation Canvas is shown on startup
Show Deprecated Analyses: Sometimes a version of GEOperformance deprecates old analyses
and replaces them with improved versions. Check this option to show these old analyses in the
Data Explorer
Reset Dockable Windows Locations : Click this button to move all undocked windows back to the
center of the primary screen
2.7.3 Directories
This page of the Options control shows the locations in which GEOperformance stores data that is
not stored in the database, such as analysis results. Most of these options are shown here for
information only and are changed elsewhere, such as in the Administrator Console.
Map Server WMS to use: The port number (typically 8001) selected during the installation of
MapServer. MapServer is an open-source platform for publishing spatial data and interactive
mapping applications to the web. For more details, see http://mapserver.org/ . In
GEOperformance, it is used for map visualization.
Virtual Earth Tile Cache Folder: The location in which to store the map tiles downloaded from
the Virtual Earth servers. The Microsoft Virtual Earth platform provides geospatial data for
visualization. For more details, see http://www.microsoft.com/virtualearth/. Tiles for specific
locations are downloaded and saved to the specified folder when the Virtual Earth layer is
displayed on a Map control. Click Calculate to see the size of the cache folder.
2.7.4 Correlation Module

These options are only available if the Correlation Module is licensed for your installation.
This page of the Options control enables you to configure external software applications that the
Correlation Module can launch for further investigation of specific cells.
External Tools: Click Add to specify a new external application. For each application, specify the
following:
Page 44
o Title: The tool name that will be shown in the Correlation Module
o Path: The path to the executable for the software application, or command to be run in DOS
o Sector Parameter: The sector parameter that will be passed to the executable. This can be
represented in a command line as %PARAM%
Once external tools have been configured, External Tools options will be shown in the Cell Group
Details and in the Correlation Module pane.
2.7.5 Time Period

This page of the Options control specifies the default Time Period filter used for new documents.
For information on how this is inherited by analysis filters, see Filter Hierarchy.
By default, the Time Period is set to the last 5 days.
Arieso recommends that you use relative dates for the document default. If you choose to default
to specific dates, remember to update them periodically to avoid very outdated filter defaults.
2.7.6 Geographical Area

This page of the Options control allows the user to set the default Geographical Area used for new
documents. For information on how this is inherited by analysis filters, see Filter Hierarchy.
If a Geographical Area is not specified, GEOperformance will automatically calculate one based on
the loaded Network Configuration.
2.7.7 Other Parameters

This page of the Options control sets some global analysis options.
'Maximum number of calls returned limit' for some analyses: Limits the maximum number of
calls that can be analyzed for certain call table analyses. Arieso recommend that this should be
left at the default of 50 000
Note: All the settings on this page require administrative privileges.
2.7.8 Analysis Results Cache

This page of the Options control allows management of the analysis results storage area so that it
does not grow too large.
Location: The folder in which analysis results are stored
Size: Click the Calculate button to see the current size of the analysis results folder. Click the
Empty Now button to delete all the cached analysis results. All analyses run after emptying the
cache will perform full calculations rather than being able to retrieve previous results.
Alternatively, click Delete Excess Analysis Results Now to delete only the oldest results
Disk space to use: The maximum size of the analysis results folder. If the folder goes over the
specified size then the analysis results that were last retrieved the longest time ago are deleted.
This is checked on login, so the folder size can go over this threshold while using GEOperformance
Delete Excess Analysis Results Now: Click to reduce the disk space used to the specified
threshold by deleting the oldest analysis results. Alternatively, click Empty Now to delete all
saved analysis results
Note: These are Administrator options not available to normal users.
Page 45
2.7.9 Map Control Defaults
This page of the Options control allows the user to set the default map control characteristics that
are used when a new document is created.
Zoom to this area: The default area shown on a map control. Click Reset to return to the default
of: -40.000000, -160.000000, 80.000000, 160.000000
Show Network Layer: Select to show sites and cells on a map control by default
Show Virtual Earth Layer: Select to show Virtual Earth information on a map control by default.
Choose either the Roads, Aerial, or Hybrid Virtual Earth views
Show cursor position coordinates: Specify the format in which to show the cursor position on
the map
Mouse radius when in select mode: How close the mouse must be to a cell icon in order to
select that cell (in km)
2.7.10 Visible Columns

This page of the Options control allows users to select the columns or metrics shown in various
analyses, tool-tips and other displays, grouped by technology.
For example, to set the cell details that are shown in analyses such as Device Comparison by Cell,
select the technology, click the Edit... button next to Default Cell in Analyses, and select the desired
columns.
ariesoGEO Options - Edit Visible Columns
Sets of columns that can be edited include (but are not limited to):
The default cell details shown in table analyses
Neighbor cell details shown in analyses and when viewing neighbor plans
Cell details shown in the neighbor spider tooltip
Cell details shown in the Network Search dialog
The site and cell tooltips shown when mousing over a map control
Page 46
2.7.11 Layer 3
This page of the Options control allows the user to configure the options for the Layer 3
information shown in the Layer 3 tab of the Call Spider.
The Common tab controls display and refresh options:
Use the following Layer 3 Layout as the default layout: The default set of charts and other items
to show in the Layer 3 view. Alternative chart layouts can be created by Arieso personnel in order
to meet specific requirements
Synchronize Event Charts with Table Contents
The tabs for each technology set how cells are labeled (for example, by label or scrambling code)
and technology-specific options such as how the active set is ordered.

This page of the Options control shows options relating to the Problem Identification module.
Problem Identification Results Folder: The location in which the results of problem searches are
saved. This can only be changed by an administrator
Disk space to use: How large the results folder can be before older results will be deleted
2.8 Dashboards
The new GEOperformance dashboards facility provides the ability to see KPIs and trends at a
glance, from anywhere in the world, via a standard web browser.
Example dashboard
All three technologies (GSM, UMTS and LTE) can be shown alongside one another on the reports,
and the reports themselves can be easily rearranged and reformatted on-the-fly according to
individual requirements.
Dashboards also provide the ability to send email alerts to specific people if KPIs drop below a
specified threshold. These alerts can be configured by your system administrator.
Page 47
2.8.1 Getting Started
GEOperformance dashboards are accessed from a standard browser. To access the dashboard:
1. Browse to the URL provided by your system administrator. This is normally in the form http://
<servername>.<domain>.com/NetworkDashboard. For example, http://winterfell.westeros.com/
NetworkDashboard
2. Enter your GEOperformance login details

Once logged in, you will see a dashboard like the one below (although the graphs shown may be
different):
Example of a typical dashboard
Each graph is displayed in a panel. These panels can be renamed, moved and deleted according to
your preferences.
2.8.2 Changing Dashboard Layout

When you first log in, the dashboard shows a default set of panels. You can customize this display
by moving panels around, removing panels you do not want, and adding new ones from the
selection available.
Moving a panel
To move a panel, click on its title and drag it over the location you prefer for it. The panels below
will move up or down as necessary to make room.
Removing a panel
To remove a panel from the dashboard:
1. Click on the cog-shaped Settings icon at the top right of the panel
2. Click Remove
3. Click OK to confirm
Page 48
Changing panel settings
The panel is removed from the dashboard, and any panels below it are moved up.
Adding a panel
1. Click on the cog-shaped Settings icon at the top right of the page, next to the Log out button
2. Click Add Panels
3. Scroll to the panel you want to add, and click Add Now. The panel is immediately added to the
dashboard
4. When you have added all the dashboards you want to add, click Done
The Add Panel pane
2.8.3 Changing a Panel

You can easily change the titles of panels, or change the format of the information they display.
Changing the panel title
To change the title of a panel:
2. Click Rename
3. Enter the new title
4. Press ENTER
Changing the graph format
To change the graphical format in which information is displayed:
2. Click Edit
Page 49
3. From the Display Type drop-down, choose the preferred format:
o Table
o Bar Chart
o Column
o Line Chart
4. Click Done
The panel immediately updates with the new graph format.
Page 50
3 Working with Analyses
Once you are comfortable with running individual analyses, you may want to change analysis
formats, display multiple analyses on a single control, click on individual analysis results to bring up
more detailed information, or use any other of the facilities GEOperformance provides for getting
the most out of your network data.
Tip: Many useful analysis options can be found by right-clicking on the cells, columns or title bar of
individual analyses
Tip: Some analyses begin calculating as soon as they are dragged onto the canvas. To prevent this,
uncheck the Enable Running of Analyses option on the Canvas menu before starting to set up your
analyses. When all analyses are ready and all filters are set, check the option again and click
Calculate All.
3.1 Common Analysis Tasks

The following are some examples of ways in which GEOperformance's capabilities can be used to
help improve your network.
3.1.1 Dropped Call Investigation

Areas experiencing high dropped call rates
1. Find areas with high dropped call rates. For GSM and UMTS technologies, the Worst N Cells
(Drops) analysis can be run over a large area to identify the individual cells with the highest high
dropped call counts and show the corresponding drop rates.
2. Run the Performance KPIs analysis. If an area appears to be experiencing a high dropped call
rate, or if it is suspected that it might be, a common first step is to run the Performance KPIs
analysis (available for GSM, UMTS and LTE) on the area. This analysis shows information on
traffic volume and density as well as total number of drops, drop rate, and drop rate weighted by
the number of drops. Arieso recommends running this analysis over relatively small areas (only a
few kilometers square) and filtering tightly by time and other factors.
3. Create polygons around areas of interest. Within an area there are normally smaller patches
where drops are particularly high. Create polygons around these areas so that if necessary you
can run analyses over the specific areas of interest for longer time periods. The polygons will
also provide a visual cue as to where you should be looking as you run further analyses.
4. Check coverage. A variant of the RF KPIs analysis is available for each technology. It shows
information on the signal strength and signal-to-noise ratio within each bin. Areas of low signal
strength and quality may indicate poor coverage. Areas with good signal strength but poor
quality may indicate pilot pollution.
5. Check for pilot pollution. For UMTS, run the Pilot Pollution NdB analysis on the entire area of
interest to see whether pilot pollution is high in any of the affected areas. For LTE, consider
comparing the Binned Mean Dominance Histogram for each smaller area to that for the original
area of interest.
Further investigations and actions will depend on the results. For example, in UMTS you might:
Run the Pilot Pollution Top Polluters analysis on each polygon area in order to determine which
cells are responsible for the most pilot pollution
Run the Best Server Footprint RF KPIs and RF Footprint KPIs analyses on the cells serving the
polygon areas. If the best server footprint is much smaller than the RF footprint, this indicates
Page 51
that the cell is overshooting
Run the Failure Reasons analysis on each polygon area to see the most common reason calls are
dropping. This can be used to diagnose more unusual causes for high drop rates
Users experiencing high dropped call rates
Note: Investigating the calls of individual users requires the VIP license. If this license is not installed,
you may not have access to some of the analyses described below.
1. Find the dropped calls. Use the VIP Drop Locations analysis (GSM and UMTS) filtered by Call ID,
Subscriber and other known details in order to view the call segments in which drops occurred
2. View Layer 3 data. Layer 3 Drill Down can provide extra insight into what occurred during the
call.
Further investigations and actions will depend on the results. For example, in UMTS you might:
Examine the Best Server Footprint RF KPIs and RF Footprint KPIs analyses to check for coverage
issues
Run the Call Count analysis to see to see if a specific device or manufacturer has an unusual
number of drops of this type
Use one of the Device Comparison or Device List Comparison analyses (if licensed) to see if a
specific device or manufacturer has an unusual number of drops of this type
3.2 Working with Map Analyses

The map control provides a number of features to assist with the investigation of geographical
network performance data shown on a map analysis. These include:
Searching for sites and locations using Map Search and Network Search.
Measuring distances with the Ruler
Using a non-rectangular area as a geographic filter by Drawing Polygons
Selecting Sites and Cells to view details such as height and azimuth, or to use in analyses
Viewing the exact results for a specific bin using the Raster Values at Point tool
Viewing Layer 3 information for a call segment or call with the Call Spider
Showing the relationship between a cell and its neighbors with the Neighbor Spider
Showing the relationship between cells with the same scrambling code (UMTS only) using the
Scrambling Code Connector
Showing the relationship between cells with the same Physical Cell ID (LTE only) using the PCI
Connector
You can also change layer properties, import new network layers, and more.
Page 52
3.2.1 Displaying an Analysis
To display an Analysis in a Map Control, open up the Data Explorer and select one of the Analysis
folders in the left tree view. By dragging an analysis marked with a blue bar (solid or dashed) to the
Map Control a grid or vector layer will be created. The layer will be listed in an Analysis Results
folder within the Layer View. (Note, for certain Analyses a Filter may be required before calculation
can begin):
Raster Layer displayed in ariesoGEO
Point or Vector Layer displayed in ariesoGEO
Alongside the layer name and any layer group names there may be a number of icons representing
various parameters and functions: Filter (inverted blue triangle), Status (colored circle) and Color
Scheme (color wheel)
For a raster layer the Properties dialog allows opacity to be set.
Page 53
For a points layer the Properties dialog allows opacity, symbol size and color to be set. It is possible
to set a Color Scheme against point properties by selecting the desired column from the Color field:
Point layer Properties dialog
Viewing and Exporting Map Data

The Event distribution counters feature enables you to view map data, such as the precise number
and distribution of events on a points layer or bins on a map layer, as a chart or table analysis. This
enables a quantitative view of the data and provides the ability to export it for analysis in an
external tool. Event distribution counters are available in the following forms:
Statistics: Table, Chart. Point and raster layers. Raster statistics can only be viewed as a chart.
Histogram: Table, Chart. Raster layers only
CDF: Table, Chart. Raster layers only
Each of these can be sorted, filtered, exported and so on as for a normal analysis of its type.
Launching map statistics for a Traffic Volume raster analysis layer
To view event distribution counters for an analysis:

1. Run the analysis as usual
2. If you wish to view the counters as a chart, drag a new Chart control onto the canvas
Page 54
3. Right-click on the desired analysis layer to open the right-click menu
4. Drag the desired data format (Statistics, Histogram or CDF) onto an appropriate chart control, or
directly onto the canvas to display as a table
Note: Viewing map data is available only for UMTS and LTE analyses
Ranking Points in a Points Analysis

Event Ranking ranks the information on a UMTS or LTE points analysis by the number of events
(points) associated with each instance of the specified item.
The events on an analysis can be ranked by the following items:
Cell
Device
IMEI
LTE points analysis ranked by the number of events per IMEI
To rank the items according to the number of associated events (points):

1. Run an analysis from the UMTS or LTE Points folders
2. Right-click on the analysis layer
3. Click Event Ranking by
4. Choose an item to rank by
Note: This feature requires the Client - Event Ranking license
3.2.2 Map Properties

Map controls have properties that may be set as for other objects and items on a Presentation
Canvas. The user can provide a title for the map control, set where the map control is positioned,
and set whether the Layer View and/or the Status Bar should be visible:
Page 55
Map Control Properties dialog
3.2.3 Map Control Toolbar

Each Map Control has a toolbar offering quick access to key functions related specifically to that
map. The Map Control toolbar contains functionality to navigate within a map, work with map
layers, and export to third party map providers.
Map Control toolbar
Note: The set of buttons presented may vary for different RF technologies.
Back/Forward View
The Back and Forward buttons are in the far left of the Map Control toolbar:
Back and forward buttons
Each time the user uses pan and zoom on the Map Control, the center point and zoom level are
stored in a list. The user can go back to a previous map location by pressing the Back button,
multiple times if necessary. Once the user has gone back to a previous location, pressing the
Forward button will change the location to a subsequent map location.
Show/Hide Layer View

The user can choose to show or hide the Layer View via a button on the Map Control toolbar. The
Layer View displays the list of map layer options currently available in the Map Control. The default
option is to have the Layer View shown. Toggling this button will shrink the Layer View and extend
the map to occupy the available space within the Map Control.
Map Control Layer View Toggle button
Searchable Map Control

Users can search the map for a specific location by using the Map Search facility.
Search Maps Button
Page 56
GEOperformance allows users to search by any of the following parameters :-
Latitude and Longitude
Place name
Postcode (Not available in every country)
The search can also be restricted to a specific country in order to reduce the number of results. If
there are multiple matches, these are presented as a list. The user can scroll through the list to
show each location in turn using their arrow keys. After you have finished searching, users can click
the back button to return to their original map view.
Searchable Map
Note: The map search is based on Microsoft's Bing Maps, and so has the same limitations and
constraints as Bing
Zooming
GEOperformance offers a variety of methods for zooming into and out of a geographic area shown
in a Map Control.
If the mouse has a mouse wheel, gently scrolling the mouse wheel zooms in and out of the map
image. The user may also use the + (Fixed Zoom In) and – (Fixed Zoom Out) buttons in the Map
Control toolbar to zoom in and out.
Map Control Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons
The Zoom to Area button enables the user to specify a rectangular area of interest by clicking and
dragging the mouse across the map.
Map Control Zoom to Area button
Tip: The user can also get the Zoom to Area functionality whilst in Pan mode by pressing down the
CTRL key on the keyboard.
The Continuous Zoom button enables zooming in and out of the map in a continuous (non fixed)
fashion by left and/or right mouse clicking and dragging on the map area.
Map Control Continuous Zoom button
Page 57
A Zoom control in the bottom-right of each map control shows a numerical representation of the
current zoom level. Valid values are from 1.0 (zoomed out so the user can see the whole world) to
21.0 (zoom in to the lowest level). This allows setting multiple map controls to be at exactly the
same zoom level.
Map Control Zoom control
There are a set of pre-set values, accessed from the drop-down arrow control, that can be used if
required.
Map Control Zoom drop down
Tip: An easy way to set the center point and zoom level of a map control to be the same as another is
to drag the Map Bounds icon in the bottom-right of the map control the user wishes to copy, and
drop it on another map control. This will set the second map control's center and zoom level to be
that of the first one.
Map Control Map Bounds icon
Viewing Site and Cell Details

You can view details of any cell, such as azimuth or beamwidth, by hovering the cursor over the cell
or site icon. This produces a pop-up window similar to that shown below:
Example cell selection pop-up
Page 58
To see further details such as height and scrambling code, or to keep a record of these details visible
while you perform further tasks, press the SPACE key. This opens the Sector Select information in a
Cell Group Details tab at the bottom of the window, where the Message Log normally appears. The
Cell Group Details pane can be undocked and moved in the same way as other GEOperformance
information panes.
If you have the Correlation Module installed, you can click on the Correlate button in the Sector
Select pane to view the alarm and configuration change information for a specific cell. You may
also be able to open a separate application pre-loaded with this cell's details using the External tool
button.
Analyzing a specific cell

You can run certain UMTS analyses straight from the map view by selecting the cell or cells to
analyze.
To do this:
1. From the map control toolbar, select the Select (arrow) icon
2. Right-click on a cell or site. A menu opens, offering analysis options
Note: If a menu opens offering options to copy cursor position and set map bounds, this may indicate
that you are using the wrong tool or that you have not clicked on a cell or site
3. Select an analysis to run. The analysis results will open in the map layer view
To run an analysis on multiple cells, click anywhere on the map. A window opens, showing all the
cells in the map view. Select the cells you want and close the window. Right-click on any one of the
selected cells to run the analysis.
If you have the Correlation Module installed, the menu also provides a Correlate option. Choose
this option to view the alarm and configuration change information for the selected cells.
The following analyses can be run from this menu:
Antenna Tuning Analyses
o Change Azimuth
o Change Power
o Change Tilt
o Turn Cell Off
Cell KPIs vs Distance Footprint Analyses
o Cell Performance KPIs Per Distance Map
Footprint Analyses
o Best Server Footprint RF KPIs
o Footprint RF KPIs
o RF Processed Footprint RSCP
o Strongest Server Footprint RF KPIs
Page 59
Panning the map
The Pan button on the Map Control toolbar allows the image displayed in the Map Control to be
panned around to reveal different geographic areas at a given Zoom level. Click and drag the map
display to pan around the image. Once the mouse button is lifted, it will update the image, reloading
any information (e.g. Virtual Earth tiles or active analysis layers) that it needs:
Map Control Pan button
Spider Call Identify

The Spider Call Identity button on the Map Control toolbar is used to show details of network
connections made by mobile devices, as marked on a Map Control. When a Call Segment or
Connection is selected with the button enabled, the Call Spider control appears and a Call Spider
Layer is added to the map's Layer View, These items carry detailed information on the selected
Segment or Connection.
Map Control Spider Call Identity button
The Spider control shows the Segment properties, details of the measured Cells and allows L3 Drill
Down to be launched.
GEOperformance Spider control - the properties shown are appropriate to the RF technology of the selected call or connection
Note: The information revealed by the Spider control is dependent on the type of data available for a
specific network technology and equipment, and also on what the operator has designated as
important for collection.
Page 60
The Spider layer presents lines between the point and the measured cells. Lines are colored from
light to dark gray, lighter colors indicating better signals (i.e. higher Ec/Io). The Best Server observed
at the start of the segment is shown by green dashing and the Best Server seen at the end is marked
by red dashing, so changes in server or handovers can be observed in the progress of the call or
connection.
Map Control Spider Layer
Tip: Hovering the mouse over a spider leg will show key measurement and cell information.
Spider Neighbor Identify

The Spider Neighbor Identity button on the Map Control toolbar is used to show details of neighbor
plan relationships between cells, as marked on a Map Control. When a Site or Cell is selected with
the button enabled, the Neighbors Spider control box appears and a Spider Layer is added to the
map's Layer View. These items carry detailed information on the neighbor relationships for a
selected cell.
Map Control Spider Neighbor Identity button
The Neighbor Spider control shows the Segment properties and details of the selected Cells.
ariesoGEO Neighbor Spider control
Page 61
Scrambling Code Connector
The Scrambling Code Connector button on the Map Control toolbar allows the user to display
potential scrambling code collisions. Selecting the icon and selecting a cell will display lines to any
other cells located within the map's current displayed area that have the same scrambling code.
Scrambling Code Connector button
Scrambling Code Connector in Map Control
All potential scrambling code collisions can be displayed using the All Scrambling Code Collisions
button when at zoom level 11 or above.
All Scrambling Code Connectors button
All Scrambling Code Connections
Note: the scrambling code connector option is only available for UMTS. For LTE, see the PCI
Connector.
Page 62
PCI Connector
The PCI Connector button on the Map Control toolbar allows the user to display potential Physical
Cell ID collisions. Click the icon and select a cell to display lines to any other cells that have the
same PCI. Note that cells outside the current map view will not be shown.
PCI Connector button
PCI Connector in Map Control
All potential PCI collisions (cells with the same ARFCN and PCI) can be displayed using the All PCI
Connectors button. To use this, you must zoom in the map to level 11 or above.
All PCI Connectors button
Note: the PCI connector option is only available for LTE. For UMTS, see the Scrambling Code
Connector.
Raster Analysis at Point

The Raster Analysis at Point option in the Map Control toolbar is used to view detailed raster
information on a specific bin (pixel) of the map. When this option is selected, clicking at a location
on a Map Control will produce a display that lists the contents of Raster Layers at that selected
location. The display shows a list of those rasters that are current selected for display on the map.
For each layer it then shows the numerical value held in the raster at that location, the range into
which this value falls in the legend assigned to the raster and the color corresponding to this legend
range in the raster's Color Scheme. An option within this display enables the dynamic updating of
the visualized raster information as the mouse moves over the map.
Raster Analysis button
Page 63
Raster Analysis dialog
Selected Cells
To select cells from a Map control for Footprint Analysis activate the Select mode, by pressing the
Select button on a Map Control toolbar. Clicking on a Show Selected Cell Window symbol in a Map
control will open the Selected Cells dialog window:
Show Selected Cells Window Button
Selected Cells Window
The Selected Cells window provides a list of those cells which are currently selected and allows the
user to select which frequency bands and/or channel numbers to select cells from. If only a single
carrier is selected only a single cell will be selected when it is clicked on in Select Mode.
Page 64
If too many cells have been selected, unnecessary cells can be removed using the Cell tooltip. The
tooltip can be made into a window using the Space key, and then undesired cells de-selected:
Sector tooltip dialog
If the Map control is clicked away from any sites all cells within the Mouse Radius defined under
Options dialog under Map Control Defaults are returned in a selection dialog.
Drawing Polygons
A polygon is a sequence of points, or nodes, that is drawn in the map control to mark the boundary
of an enclosed geographic area. Polygons can be used for geographical filtering.
To create a new polygon:
1. Click the Polygon button in the Map Control toolbar. The mouse cursor changes to a
crosshair, and a new polygon layer appears
2. Click on the map to set the first node in the polygon. Continue clicking to set more nodes:
Polygon Creation
Note: The sides of a polygon cannot cross over. Placing a node that would cause a polygon to cross
over itself will cause a 'self-intersecting polygon' error message to appear. Click on a valid node
location to continue.
3. Finally, click on the starting point to close the area:
Page 65
Completing a polygon
Deleting points
While drawing the polygon, you can press the ESCAPE key to undo mouse clicks and remove nodes.
Each key press will delete a polygon node until the polygon itself is removed.
To abort polygon creation at any time, click on the Pan button. The polygon will disappear and the
temporary polygon map layer will be removed.
Editing polygon colors
The completed polygon is filled in a semi-transparent blue color with a matching blue outline. To
change the color, opacity, or line thickness, right-click on the polygon layer and select Properties.
Saving and loading polygons
After a polygon has been drawn, you can save it to the Local folder of the Data Explorer.
1. Click on the name of the polygon layer to edit it
2. Change the layer name to something relevant and memorable and press ENTER
3. Right-click on the polygon layer and choose Save Polygon…
4. Click Save. The polygon filename defaults to the name of the polygon layer
5. The new polygon automatically appears in the Local folder
To load a saved polygon into a map control, simply drag the polygon file from the Data Explorer into
a map control. It will be added as a new map layer.
Ruler
The user can make distance measurements on a Map control using the Ruler function. To create a
ruler, press the Ruler button in the Map Control toolbar.
Page 66
Map Control Ruler button
When the Ruler is selected, the cursor will change to crosshairs. Clicking on the map will mark the
start point for ruler measurements. A green square enclosed in a circle will be placed to mark this
start.
As the crosshairs cursor is moved, an orange line will be drawn between the starting point and the
current cursor position, along with a dynamically updated measurement of the distance (in meters
and km).
To remove the start point and start again, press the ‘Escape’ key on the keyboard. This will remove
the start point and also the temporary ruler map layer.
To finish the ruler and have it permanently create a map layer, click again to place the end point.
The end point will appear as a red square enclosed by a circle. The orange ruler line will then be
preserved as a Layer in the map, with the final distance appearing in the middle. The distance will
also be shown in the ruler’s name in the map's Layer View. As with any Map Layer, the name of the
Layer may be changed by editing the Properties.
Ruler on Map
Full Extents
The Full Extents option on a Map Control toolbar is used in order to view the full map extents for all
layers currently present in the Map Control. This means that the rectangular map area will be
adjusted so that all map layers can be visualized in the map.
Map Control Full Extents button
Note: layer specific extent options are also available by right-clicking on a layer; for more details,
check the layer related descriptions later in this section.
Refresh
The user can select this option in order to refresh the Layers visualized in the Map control.
Map Control Refresh button
Note: the map updating is typically automatic.
Page 67
Google Earth Export
The Google Earth Export option on the Map Control toolbar can be used to export map layers as
Google Earth Report on GEOWeb or save a .KMZ file. Detailed network analysis can then be
continued using GEOperformance geo-located maps in the Google Earth ‘environment’.
To export maps in other formats, see Exporting Map Layers.
Map Control Google Earth Export button
Two options will be presented:
Google Earth Export
The Publish option will send the report to the Web Reports server where the Google Earth Reports
can be reviewed:
Google Earth Publish
Page 68
A representative example of the level of detail that Google Earth maps can add to the
GEOperformance use is depicted in the following figure:
It is evident from the previous figure that Google Earth enables the drill-down network performance
analysis to building and street level.
Note: Google Earth is now being commonly used by many mobile operators worldwide, and support
for Google Earth visualization has been added to many software solutions, including ariesoACP; for
more details, please check http://earth.google.com/.
Page 69
3.2.4 Layer View
The Layer View is the pane to the left of the Map control. It shows the layers of information
currently available for the map. Check the box next to a layer to show that information on the map,
or uncheck it to hide that information.
Upper layers are superimposed on top of lower layers, so that for example in the layer view shown
below cells are shown on top of analyses, which in turn are shown on top of the Virtual Earth map.
Map Layer list within a Map Control
For more information on working with layers, see:

Changing Layer Visibility
Changing Layer Order
Network Layers
Changing Layer Visibility

Click on the checkbox next to a map layer to show or hide that map layer. For example, in the map
control shown below the Sites Layer and the GSM Cells Layer, are not checked. The map view
therefore does not show either sites or GSM cells.
Hiding site and sector layers in the Map control
To change display properties, right click on the layer name, and select Properties (F4). This allows
the user to change the display Properties, such as the color and transparency of items in the display:
Page 70
Sector Properties dialog
Changing Layer Order

Map layers are shown on the map according to the order in which they appear in the Layer View.
This means that the results of analyses shown at the top of the Layer View overlay those below.
To change the order of analysis or map layers, select a layer and click the layer order buttons to
move it up or down.
Layer order buttons
Note: These arrows are only available if the Map Control Layer View is visible.
Tip: You can also use the U (up) and D (down) keys in the keyboard.
Deleting a layer
To delete a Map layer from the Layer View of a Map control, select it and click the Delete button at
the top left of the Map control.
Layer View Delete button
Alternatively, you can use the Delete key on your keyboard. Ensure a layer is selected before
deleting or the entire map control will be removed.
Page 71
Network Layers
Maps The locations of network equipment such as sites and cells are represented on the Map
Control by a set of Network Layers. These network layers show symbols representing the types of
network equipment at each location.
The network layers create two layers, one for sites and one for cells, based on the network data
imported into the GEOperformance database. Both sites and cells are color-coded by technology:
Network layer showing GSM and UMTS sites and cells
The orange circles represent multiple cells, grouped into a single icon in order to avoid cluttering the
map. Right-click on the Sites layer and select Properties to change this and other settings.
Note: If there is Small Cell information available, the map control will show an additional layer for
small cells such as femto cells and WiFi cells.
Note: If you have the Correlation Module, the map control will show additional layers that add rings
to each cell showing their update or alarm status.
You can also drag Network Themes onto the map to color code cells by, for example, Scrambling
Code or Routing Area Code (RAC).
Note: You may sometimes see cells that are not attached to sites. These represent distributed
antenna systems (DAS)
You can set the sites and cells to be displayed by checking the desired Cells technology layers, and
by right-clicking on Sites and selecting the desired technologies. Sites will be shown if they contain a
cell of the selected technology, even if they also contain cells of other technologies.
Same map as above, showing both GSM and UMTS sitse, but only UMTS cells
Network Layer Properties
Page 72
Right-clicking Network Layer will open a list of options relating to the layer:
Network Layer Options
Center map on layer will center the map on the Network Layer without affecting the current zoom
level
Zoom to layer extents will center the map on the Network Layer and change the zoom level so that
the entire network fits into the map window
Save current network scheme to file allows the user to save the Network Scheme to a file to allow
sharing it with a colleague.
Save current network scheme as Default allows the user to set the Network Scheme as a default,
used for every new Map Control.
Set Network Scheme from File allows the user to load a Network Scheme.
Set Network Scheme from Default resets the Network Scheme to the default.
Set Network Scheme from Factory Settings resets the Network Scheme to the default installation.
Reload Network from Database will update the current view of the Network. This is useful if there
have been any updates to the database contents.
Properties displays the Properties applicable to both the Sites and Cells. The user can only display
Properties of the network schemes for Sites or Cells by right-clicking on Sites or Cells, respectively.
Click on the Site or Cells in the Map control and display details about the individual attributes of
each Site/Cell, as shown below.
Network Layer Properties
Importing Additional Network Layers

It is also possible to include additional network layers on a map. Click the green plus icon, or right
click on the tree view on the left of the map control and select “Import Network Layer”.
Note: that the imported layer is for display purposes only and cannot be used in Neighbour Planning,
Filters or Analyses.
Page 73
The new layer to be imported must contain details of all the cells in the layer, formatted as a CSV
file. The columns required are as follows:
CellLabel, Longitude, Latitude, RNCId, CellId, SiteId, Switch, Technology, Azimuth, PSC,
FrequencyBand, Height, AntennaPatternName, Beamwidth, VerticalBeamwidth, ElectricalTilt,
MechanicalTilt, Tilt, CellType, PositionType, Radius, BaseStationPower, CellLoad, CellNoise,
CpichPowPercent, DownlinkLoss, UplinkLoss, CpichPower,ReceptionLoss,TransmissionLoss
For example:
CellName,99.99,88.88,37,1234,Site1,Switch1,UMTS,20,27,112,9,Antenna,60,5.5,0,0,0,Macro,Outdoo
r,0,42.9,75,3,8.12,2.19,-3.7,20,0,0
After import, the new layer will appear in the map as shown below:
Import Network Layer
Height and Region Layers

If you have height or region files configured, you can show the height and region grids used by those
features in your map control.
Height and region files are required by the Export to ariesoACP feature, but you do not need to have
these features installed in order to view the grids in the map control.
Adding a Height or Region Layer
Setting up Heights and Regions Files

The heights file and regions file should be in ESRI grid format. The height file provides a topographic
model of the bare earth/underlying terrain of the Earth’s surface, whereas the regions file specifies
land use.
To set up heights and regions:
Page 74
1. Copy your height and region files into separate directories on the application server.
2. Open the GEOperformance Administrator Console and log in.
3. Click the GEO Areas tab and select the relevant GEO Area.
4. In the Heights Directory and Regions Directory options, enter the folder locations in which the
relevant grid files are saved.
5. Click Update GEO Area to save your changes.
Virtual Earth Layer

The Virtual Earth map layer is a layer included in a Map control, used to show a representation of
the geographic area to assist in identifying locations of detail. Its display can be configured via
settings in the map control's Layer View.
Change the Virtual Earth layer by right-clicking on the Layer in the Layer View to the left of the Map
control, and then selecting one of the three map layers that are available from Virtual Earth:
Virtual Earth layer selection
By un-ticking the box next to the layer, the user can choose not to visualize the Virtual Earth layer in
the Map control.
Page 75
Analysis Layer Visibility
The visibility of Analysis layers may be controlled through three sets of buttons presented in the
Layer View:
Analysis visibility control
Select All (layered check box with tick circled above) selects to display all Layer Check boxes.
Unselect All (layered check box without tick circled above) selects to deselect all Layer Check
boxes.
Layer Check box (to left of name) selects to display the layer or group.
Where the Layer Check box is for the top layer of a group, de-selecting display overrides the settings
of all layers in the group without changing those settings, checking enables the settings of the
grouped layers. As such it is possible to turn off all layers with a single click without losing individual
layer settings.
Adding Labels
It is possible to add labels to points imported from CSV files or the output of point analyses. This
can be done by right clicking the analysis or imported point data in the map tree view and selecting
Properties. The Label Field dropdown is then used to select the desired label.
Layer Properties - Adding Labels
Page 76
Exporting Map Layers
You can export the selected layer (such as analysis results) in formats that can be used in other
software products, such as CSV, TAB and IMG.
To export, right click a Layer and select the Export option:
Layer export option
Export grid dialog
Most layers can be directly visualized in MapInfo (provided that the MapInfo software has also been
installed) by selecting the Open in Mapinfo option.
Supported formats include:
Point/Vector Data Formats

ASCII comma delimited format (CSV)
MapInfo Vector Map format (TAB)
MapInfo Interchange Format (MIF)
ESRI Shapefile Format (SHP)
Binned/Raster Data Formats

Band Interleaved by Line format (BIL)
Gridded Data Format (GRD)
ERDAS IMAGINE image file format (IMG)
Page 77
Tabular Data Formats
Microsoft Excel (v2010 and above) format
(XLSX)
3.3 Working with Table Analyses

Saving analysis results
Table analyses can be saved as .csv or Excel files using the following buttons:
Save Table to CSV Open in Excel
Viewing specific data

To change the order of the data in the table, right-click on any column heading and select a sorting
option.
To view only specific data:
1. Click the Filter button in the table menu to filter the contents of the table. This adds small filter
arrows to each of the column headings
2. Click on the arrows to access the filter options. Select specific values or set thresholds.
Filter options
Finding specific values
Page 78
A table can be searched for a specific text string using the Find button. Clicking on the button opens
a Find box, allowing the user to enter the desired string an navigate to the Next/Previous instance of
the string:
Table control Find mode
Coloring data according to its value

Apply a color scheme to a table by clicking on the Edit Color Scheme button. This button displays the
Data Grid Row Coloring Editor, allowing a Color Scheme to be created based upon a selected column
either directly or using the Color Scheme Editor.
Edit color scheme button
Once column is selected click Create to review the Color Scheme Editor. Use Gradient Editor or
Generate Table to change colors as required. Once colors are set, drag the Color Scheme icon as
shown in the following diagram.
Data Grid Row Coloring Editor - Column Select
Selecting the Color Scheme icon enables or disables the color scheme.
Viewing a cell's alarms and updates
This option is only available if your system has the Correlation Module licensed. If the table
includes a Label column, right-click on any cell label and select Correlate to show that cell's alarms
and updates in the Correlation Module.
Note: This option is only available for cells in columns named Label. Right-clicking on cell labels in
columns with other names will not provide a Correlate option.
Page 79
3.4 Working with Chart Analyses
The chart analysis control provides a number of ways to improve the readability and appearance of
data, such as the type of chart shown, the colors on the chart, and the sizes of the axes and the key.
3.4.1 Line Charts Example

Create a new Chart control by dragging a Chart from the toolbox onto a Presentation Canvas
background. From the Data Explorer, drag an analysis and drop it onto the Chart control. The user
should see a chart with line series similar to the following:
Line Chart Example
The colors may be different as the Chart control uses random colors initially. In this example the
values in the 3 series vary quite widely, the VoiceCalls line cannot be seen clearly. Change the
visibility of each series by toggling the checkbox next to it. This will enable them to be seen in better
detail.
To change the type of each series, right-click on the chart control and choose Properties. The
Properties window lists each type of series.
In the Properties window, for Series 2 (VoiceKilobits), change the Chart Type to be StackedColumn:
Chart Properties
Note: be careful when choosing Chart Types, since some are not compatible with the data or with
each other.
Change the colors of each series by double-clicking on the colored rectangle next to each series:
Page 80
Line Chart Colour Editor
Move the dividing line between the legend and the chart to make the legend bigger or smaller, by
hovering over the space in between the legend and chart and dragging.
3.4.2 Pie Chart Example

Create a new Chart control by dragging a Chart from the toolbox onto a Presentation Canvas
background. The example below illustrates the process. Firstly, drag a Chart Control to the
presentation canvas. Secondly, from the Data Explorer, drag a suitable analysis, e.g. the Failure
Reasons analysis, onto the Chart Control to create a line graph showing the results of the ‘Failure
Reasons’ analysis.
Pie Chart - Create Chart Control
Page 81
Show the Chart’s properties in the Properties window, and change the Chart Type of Series 1 to Pie
and the Stroke Thickness to 1:
Chart Properties
Page 82
A pie chart is produced with one color legend:
Pie Chart - Non Colored
To apply coloring to the Pie Chart some analysis have pre-configured color schemes in the data
explorer color scheme folder. These can be easily dropped onto the Pie chart. However, if this does
not exist another way would be to produce a table of the same analyses, color it and apply the
colors scheme to the Pie Chart.
Coloring Table to apply to Pie Chart
Drag the Color Scheme from the table to the Chart control. The colors are updated accordingly.
Page 83
Pie Chart - Drap Color from Table Colour Scheme
3.5 Using the Color Scheme Editor

When an Analysis is run and displayed in a Map Control or Chart Control, a default Color Scheme is
automatically applied.
Note: Appropriate default Color Schemes are pre-specified. It is possible for an administrator to
override default settings.
Change the Color Scheme by using the Color Scheme Editor. To do this, click on the Color Scheme
Editor button on the Home ribbon. The Color Scheme Editor dialog will appear:
Color Scheme Editor dialog
The Color Scheme Editor toolbar allows a new Color Scheme to be created or an existing Color
Scheme to be edited. From left to right the buttons allow the user to:
Create Empty Color Table creates a blank Color Scheme table to be applied to an Analysis
presenting numeric outputs.
Create Empty Color String Table creates a blank Color Scheme table to be applied to an Analysis
presenting natural language outputs.
Add New Row adds a new row to the Color Scheme table.
Delete Row removes a row from the Color Scheme table.
Page 84
Set Random Colors generates random colors for the color scheme.
Create Labels from Values generates labels based upon the From and To columns for a numeric
Color Scheme table.
Save Color Scheme saves the exiting color scheme to a file accessible from the Data Explorer.
Fields of the Color Scheme table can be edited by double clicking the field. In the case of the Color
field a color picker is presented. Once created a Color Scheme can be applied to an analysis by
dragging the Color Scheme icon on the top left of the Color Scheme editor to the Analysis in
question.
A Color Scheme can be selected for editing by double clicking a Color Scheme icon next to an analysis
or by dragging the icon from the Analysis or Data Explorer to the Color Scheme editor.
Two tools, the Table Generator and the Gradient Editor, can be launched to speed the generation
of Color Schemes by automatically generating the set of ranges within the scheme and the set of
colors to apply across those ranges.
3.5.1 Changing the Canvas, Table and Chart Background Colors

To change the default plain grey and white background colors used for the canvas and analyses,
click the Color Scheme Editor button on the Home ribbon.
Color Scheme
Editor button
By default, the controls on the Presentation Canvas are presented against a plain background. The
user can apply a linear gradient to change the background colors of a Presentation Canvas, and of
the Table controls and Chart controls it contains. To do this, open the Color Scheme Editor dialog,
show the Gradient Editor, choose a color gradient, and drag the gradient from the box underneath
it:
Color Scheme Editor dialog Gradient Editor
Drop it on to the Presentation Canvas background, the background of a Chart control or the status
bar of a Table control, and the background will be updated.
Page 85
Examples of colored backdrops
Page 86
3.5.2 Gradient Editor
Within the Color Scheme Editor, the Gradient Editor allows the easy generation of Color Schemes
based on the transition between two or more colors. To launch the Gradient Editor click on the
Gradient Editor button on the Color Scheme Editor:
Color Scheme Editor with open Gradient Editor showing a three color transition
Gradients can be transferred from the Gradient Editor to the Color Scheme table using the Arrow
buttons half way down the Gradient Editor, and vice versa. The buttons on the toolbar at the top of
the Gradient Editor from left to right are:
Delete All Colors allowing the Gradient Editor to be reset to blank.
Flip Colors Vertically flipping the order of the Gradient Editor from top to bottom.
To add new colors to the gradient double click to the left of the color transition and a Color Picker
will be presented. The Color boxes can be dragged vertically to alter the rate of the transition.
As well as allowing the generation of Color Schemes, the Gradient Editor can be used to generate a
backdrop color for a Table, Chart or Presentation Canvas. To apply the backdrop drag the Gradient
icon on the top left of the Gradient Editor to relevant Control or Canvas.
3.5.3 Generate Table

Within the Color Scheme Editor, the Table Generator allows ranges of numbers to be generated
between start and end values according to some regular interval.
Color Scheme Editor with Generate Table open
To generate a new numeric Color Scheme table enter minimum and maximum value, and select
whether to use the current number of bands in the existing Color Scheme, to set an incremental
value for a band or define a number of color bands. Either a linear or logarithmic Color Scheme table
can then be rapidly generated by selecting the appropriate button.
Page 87
3.6 Using Variables
There are certain items of information that may be used throughout GEOperformance but that may
vary from project to project or region to region. These items are defined as Variables that are
stored as part of the project document and that can be referenced by various functions and
controls within the product. For example Variables can be used in Filters to allow a large number of
analysis results to be modified with a single change.
Note: The Document Variables are not the same as the Document filter. Settings for the two can
differ.
If your system has the Client - Data Partitioning license installed, you can use a variable with
multiple values to set a document to automatically run a set of analyses for each value.
Variables are defined within the Variables Editor dialog, accessed by clicking the Variables Editor
button on the Home Ribbon Menu.
Default ariesoGEO Variables
Twelve default Variables exist:

Network Bounds defines the bounding box of the area that the loaded Network Configuration
covers.
Loaded Data Bounds defines the bounding box of geolocated data within the GEOperformance
database.
Loaded Data Date defines the period over which loaded data is available.
Today defines the current 24 hour period of loading, from midnight to midnight.
Yesterday defines the previous 24 hour period of loading, from midnight to midnight.
This week defines the current week of loading, from midnight to midnight.
Last week defines the last week of loading, from midnight to midnight.
This month defines the current month of loading, from midnight to midnight.
Last month defines the previous month of loading, from midnight to midnight.
Document Bounds defines a bounding box Variable for the current document.
Document Time Period defines a time period for the current document.
Document Day Hour Settings defines Day Hour Settings for the current document.
Note: Today, Yesterday, This week, This month and Last month are defined relative to loaded data
rather than to the system clock, which is used for relative filters. As such the variable Yesterday is
different from the filter option Yesterday.
Page 88
3.6.1 Creating New Variables
To create a new Variable:
1. Click on the Variables Editor button on the Home ribbon:
GEOperformance Variables Editor button
2. Click New...
3. Select the Variable Type. This sets the filter type to which the variable applies.
New Variable window, showing selection of Variable types
4. Add one or more values to the variable.

5. If you want to use the variable in a document template, you may want to check the Prompt
option. This will prompt users using the template to create new documents to edit the variable.
6. To use the variable in a partitionable document, check the Partitionable option. For more
information, see Running Sets of Analyses.
Page 89
3.6.2 Using Variables in the Filter Editor
Once Variables have been created they can be accessed and used in various controls, most
specifically in the Filter Editor.
Time Period, Day Hour Settings and Geographic Area Filter Items
The Filter items in the Filter Editor contain an option to use a Variable, along with a combo box
allowing an appropriate Variable to be chosen. Select the Use a Variable radio button and then
choose the desired Variable:
Selecting a Variable in the Filter Editor
Other Filter Items

The other Filter item types have an Add Variables option in the Add Values dialog. A combo box
contains all the appropriate Variables for that Filter item type. To add a Variable to the list of
selected values, choose a value from the combo box and press the Add button adjacent to the
combo box. This will add the Variable to the list of Selected Values, indicated by a Variable symbol
(V) and the Variable name.
Note: The Variable name (but not the actual values it represents) will then appear in the tooltip
when hovering over the Filter icon.
Page 90
3.7 Using Lists
Lists are pre-defined sets of values for a specific field or parameter. They are typically used in Filters
on Analyses to simplify the selection of values that are often grouped together. For example
searching for events relating to a group of VIP Subscribers might be simplified if those subscribers
are assembled into a List. If Lists have been imported it is possible to use them as an alternative to
regular Filters, allowing filtering of Lists of more than 50 items. List filtering is accessible through a
separate tab on the Add Values dialog:
Add Values dialog List tab
Filtering by Lists can be setup to be a negative filter by selecting the Negative check box.
Lists work in two different ways.
1) Device and Subscriber analyses require lists to function. For a Device or Subscriber analysis to
run List summarization must have taken place, typically a scheduled overnight task.
Note: GSM Device and Subscriber analyses are from Call Table and do not require List
summarization..
2) Call table analyses can use lists instead of normal filters. The Lists allow a more efficient form of
data extraction from the GEOperformance database, allowing filtering by more than 50 items.
In the filter’s tooltip – chosen list names will be prefixed by a thick ‘L’ symbol, indicating that this is a
list name rather than an individual value:
Lists in Filter tooltip
The analysis may be run as before.

Note: EITHER a selection of values OR a selection of list names may be chosen. It is not possible to
mix individual values with list names.
Page 91
3.7.1 Manage List Names
The List Name Management window is used to organize Lists of objects in GEOperformance which
can be used for filtering and analysis. To launch the List Name Management window click on the
Manage List Names button from the Home ribbon:
GEOperformance Manage List Names button
ariesoGEO List Name Management dialog
1. Click on a Filter Type to see the lists available for that filter type, along with the users who set up
the lists.
2. Click on a List Name to see the items in the list.
3. Right-click on a List Name to see list management options such as renaming the list (if you have
permission to do so)
Importing and exporting lists
You can import and export lists in CSV format. This enables you to create a custom list based on an
Excel file, or on the results of an analysis (for example, you could create a list of cells based on the
Worst N Cells (Drops) analysis).
To import a list:
1. Create a CSV file containing a single column of data
2. In the List Name Management window, click Import...
3. Select the type of information in the CSV file (such as Cell for a list of poorly performing cells)
4. In the left-hand pane, click the File and Columns tab
5. Select the file to import, and the column to use
6. Check the Create a list containing all values, with this name option and enter a list name
7. In the left-hand pane, click the Start Import tab
8. Click Start Import
When finished, the list will be shown in the List Name Management window.
To export a list, click Export..., select a location for the CSV file and click Export.
Page 92
3.8 Running Sets of Analyses
It is possible to set a GEOperformance document to automatically create multiple canvases that
run the same set of analyses, each filtered by a different cell, eNodeB or other element. This is
called Data Partitioning, and the element that each canvas is filtered to is called the partitionable
element.
A document partitioned by cell. Each canvas shows the same analyses, filtered by the cell named in the tab
To create a partitioned document:

1. Add the set of analyses you want to run to a single canvas. Set up canvas filters and analysis
filters as normal, but do not use any filter types that relate to the partionable element.
GEOperformance will set the partionable element filters automatically on the canvases it
creates. For example, if you want to generate a set of analyses for each cell, do not filter by cell
or RNC.
2. Create a new variable containing a list of the values to use, such as the individual cells. This list
should contain fewer than fifteen values. If you want to use more values, contact Arieso
Support. Check the Partitionable option.
3. Save the document.
When the document is next opened, it will create a separate canvas for each value set by the
variable. Each canvas will run the full set of analyses specified, using filters that differ only by the
partitionable element value.
Note: The first time you open the document, some analyses may need to be refreshed.
Note: Running sets of analyses requires the Client - Data Partitioning license.
Page 93
3.9 Scheduling Analyses
The Add Scheduled Task window is used to run analyses at specific times. The results can be output
to a folder, or to Web Reporting.
First, create a Template including all the analyses to run.
Set the Name, Description, the GEO template to use, choose to publish to web, setting tags and if it
is public or not. You can then choose the recurrence - currently Weekly (and choose the day(s) of
the week) and Monthly (choose the dates).
Add Scheduled Task dialog
Note: The Scheduled Report template should be configured so as to not prompt the user for input
values.
The Report can be published either to a folder or to the Web Reporting. The scheduling of the report
can be set to be either weekly (specifying the day of the week) or monthly (specifying the day of the
month).
Note: For Scheduled Reports to run Scheduling of Reports must be enabled by the system
administrator in the GEOperformance Admin Console, and an execution time set. The system
administrator may also modify or delete Scheduled Tasks from the Admin Console.
3.10 Arranging Analyses on the Canvas

You can rearrange and align all the analysis controls on the canvas by clicking the Arrange button on
the Canvas ribbon to manipulate controls that are on the Canvas. The options available are shown
below:
Page 94
Canvas alignment options
Page 95
4 Advanced Features
The Data Explorer and Presentation Canvas form the basis of working with GEOperformance.
However advanced features extend capabilities in Analysis, Optimization and Reporting. This section
of the User Guide explores advanced features in more detail.
Advanced Raster Analysis includes the ability to rapidly generate cell footprints to drill into network
performance, and the Grid Calculator allowing complex analyses of raster grids.
Call Drill Down Analysis reviews analyzing calls through the Spider control and Layer 3 Drill Down
analysis.
Optimization includes automatic Problem Identification, Automatic Neighbor Planning, Missing
Neighbor Analysis, Antenna Tuning, Scrambling Code Tuning, and export to ariesoACP.
Reporting includes the use of Templates, Web Reporting, and Scheduled Reports.
Note: Antenna Tuning analyses are not available for GSM.
4.1 Advanced Raster Analysis

A key method of using GEOperformance to drill down into network performance is to use raster
analyses, showing the geographic performance of the network on a Map Control. Advanced Raster
Analysis includes the use of the Grid Calculator to determine complex interrelationships between
performance KPIs and Cell Footprint analysis to investigate the behavior of individual cells. In
addition, Cell KPIs vs Distance can also be used to investigate cells further.
Page 96
4.1.1 Grid Calculator
The Grid Calculator is an Advanced Feature of GEOperformance for Raster Analysis that allows the
user to create powerful grids based upon existing analyses outputs combined with user entered
constants.
ariesoGEO Grid Calculator
Four types of functions can be used:

Arithmetic operators. Simple arithmetic operators including "/", "*", "-", "+", allowing generation of
ratios, use of scaling factors, summation of different layers and generation of complex KPIs from
multiple layers.
Logical operators. Including equal, not equal, greater than, greater than or equal, less than and less
than or equal, allowing comparison of different layers.
Logical functions. Including AND, OR, XOR and NOT.
Mathematical functions. Including EXP(), LOG10(), LN(), POWER().
To use the Grid Calculator the user must first generate input Analyses. The Analyses may then be
dragged from a Map control to the Grid Calculator and placed in the Source Grids area. Clicking on
an entry in the Source Grid will create a new entry referring to that grid in the Expression field. In
order to generate an Output Grid both an area mask and an Output Grid name must be defined. The
Area Mask may be set by dragging Map Bounds to the Grid Calculator Area Mask entry box.
Page 97
Grid Calculator Usage
Depending on user’s aim, simple or more complex analysis can be achieved using Grid Calculator.
Common Grid Calculator usage includes:
Pilot Pollution areas investigation to find and prioritise optimisation spots
Measure the impact of GEOperformance optimisation analysis (tilt & azimuth changes; Cell off;
CPICH power), by plotting the difference between the before and after
Locate hotspot traffic areas (number of users, MOU or data volume) with RF coverage issues
(poor coverage or low quality); to spot where new sites are needed and/or where optimisation is
required
Find coverage holes common to all UMTS deployed carriers (layers)
Locate areas with RF coverage issues (poor coverage or low quality) that are heavily used by
roamers
Compute the WiFi device density in areas of high data volume, to help operators spot where to
invest in this technology to offload the UMTS traffic.
Page 98
Grid Calculator Mathematical Functions
Mathematical functions are selected from the drop down list below the Grid Calculator keypad, or
alternatively upon typing in the Expression pane.
Mathematical function drop down menu
Mathematical functions include:

ABS(grid) returns the absolute value of a number, the value without its sign.
DistanceFrom(grid, sectorName) creates a grid sowing the distance from the given Cell in metres.
EXP(grid) returns e raised to the power of the grid.
GaussSmooth(grid) returns the grid filtered using a 5x5 Gaussian filter, resulting in smoothing of
the grid.
Histogram(grid) calculates the histogram of values for each pixel and prints them to the output
window.
LN(grid) returns the logarithm of the grid to base e.
LOG(grid, number) returns the logarithm of the grid to base of the number specified.
LOG10(grid) returns the logarithm of the grid to base 10.
MeanSmooth(grid) calculated the 3x3 mean for each pixel in the grid, effectively an unweighted
average with a smoothing effect on the grid.
NOT(grid) returns the logical NOT of the grid.
POWER(grid, number) returns the value in the grid raised to the power of the number specified.
Page 99
PrintLocationsOfValue(grid, value) prints out the locations of pixels to the Expression Output that
match the given value.
ROUND(grid) returns a gird rounded to 0dp.
UnionAdd(grid1, grid2) adds grid1 and grid 2 together, if either grid contains no data in a pixel it
returns the value of the valid grid.
UnionMultiply(grid1, grid2) multiplies grid1 and grid 2 together, if either grid contains no data in a
pixel it returns the value of the valid grid.
UnionSubtract(grid1, grid2) subtracts grid2 from grid 2 together, if either grid contains no data in a
pixel it returns the value of the valid grid.
Grid Calculator Example

Before using Grid Calculator, all analyses of interest to the computation should be created.
Start by defining the boundaries of the analysis in the Area Mask field, either by dragging the Map
Bounds or a Polygon. Then, drag all previous created analyses from the Map Control to the Grid
Calculator window and drop them in the Source Grids area.
Grid Calculator Example
Just below the Source Grid area, find the Expression field where the computation expression is
inserted. Add an analysis by double clicking on its entry in the Source Grids and build the expression
by using the available operators and functions.
Use the GO button to create the Output Grid according to the expression defined. The resulting
analysis is then presented in the Output Grid area, together with some status information.
Page 100
Finally, Drag-and-drop the Output Grid entry to a Map Control area and the result analysis is added
to a map layer.
Grid Calculator - Example Output
In this example the Color Scheme can be configured according to results values (in this case 0 or 1
due to logical operations).
Grid Calculator Edit Output Layer Color Scheme
Once Color Scheme is applied unselect and reselect the Analysis Layer to see the scheme applied.
Grid Calculator Example - Final Output
Page 101
4.1.2 Cell Footprint Analysis
Cell Analysis is an Advanced Feature in GEOperformance for Raster Analysis. It enables the user to
select one or multiple cells and by right clicking, and then to run a chosen footprint analysis on the
selected cells.
Running Footprint Analysis

A Footprint Analysis is an Analysis that is focused information pertaining to the footprint area of a
selected cell or cells. Footprint analyses are run by first selecting and right-clicking a Cell or Cells and
the Analysis menu will be shown. By clicking any one of the Footprint Analyses it will run for the
selected Cell(s).
Footprint Analyses (GSM) includes:
Best Server Footprint RF KPIs
RF Footprint KPIs
Footprint Analyses right mouse menu - GSM footprints shown
Page 102
Footprint Analyses (UMTS) includes:
Best Server Footprint RF KPIs
RF Footprint KPIs
RF Processed Footprint RSCP
Strongest Server Footprint RF KPIs
Footprint Analyses right mouse menu - UMTS footprints shown
4.1.3 Cell KPIs vs Distance

RF KPIs by Timing Advance (distance) analyses can be viewed on the map, based on Cell beam width
and azimuth. The analysis can be run by right clicking a GSM or UMTS Cell on the map with the
Arrow Tool and selecting the Cell KPIs vs Timing Advance Map. The analysis can be run also from the
Data Explorer as a table or chart.
GSM Cell KPIs vs Distance
Cell KPIs vs Distance Parameters

Once a cell is selected the Parameters Editor box may appear - usually when there is 2 or more
carriers are on the same cell. If this is the case double click the entry in the Value column to
correctly identify which cell. For UMTS, since Timing Advance is not available a Binned Distance
interval can be specified.
Cell KPIs vs Distance Output

Additional filter criteria can also be applied to the analyses, e.g. Time, Geographical Area etc. The
example below shows the typical output from an analyses.
Page 103
GSM Cell KPIs vs Distance - Results
Page 104
RxQual DL Median
RxQual UL Median
RxLev DL Average
RxLev UL Average
BTS TCH Power Average
MS Power Average
Timing Advance Median
Pathloss DL Average
Pathloss UL Average
Pathloss Difference (DL – UL) Average
FER DL Average
FER UL Average
4.2 Call Drill Down Analysis

GEOperformance provides two different Advanced Features for drilling down into the contents of
calls: the Spider tool and Layer 3 Drill Down.
The Spider tool provides drill down to the level of the Call Table in the GEOperformance database,
presenting information about Connection Segments which consist of periods of time in which a
specific mobile device has exchanged a number of messages with the network. Layer 3 Drill Down
reloads the raw trace files to present information on a per message level, as well as through charts
and time series.
4.2.1 Spider Drill Down

The Spider is an Advanced Feature of GEOperformance. It provides a method of Call Drill Down
Analysis to the level of the Call Table in the GEOperformance database, presenting information
about Call Segments which may consists of a period of time containing a number of messages. Two
forms of information are presented initially; the Properties of each Call Segment and Spider details
of measurements of other cells made during each Call Segment.
Call Segments in GEOperformance are the basic segments into which a call is split for loading into
the database.
In UMTS a Call Segment is started with the start of a call, with a measurement report, a RAB change
or the start of a 15 minute recording period. Where there is a high density of Call Segment they are
merged into Call Segment representing 5 second periods in the call.
In GSM a Call Segment is started with the start of a call, after 10 seconds of Measurement Reports,
a service change or a handover, or the start of a 15 minute recording period.
Page 105
Launching the Spider
To perform Call Drill Down Analysis, The Call Spider control can be launched in two ways. Selecting
the Call Spider button from the Map Control toolbar of a chosen Map Control will present a blank
dialog, until a Connection Segment from a Points analysis is selected. Alternatively the Spider dialog
can be launched by right mouse clicking a Call ID in a Table control:
Table right mouse menu with options to launch Spider - Show Call Properties
Launching the Call Spider brings up the Spider control as well as a Call Spider Layer in the active Map
control and associated Layer View. The Spider control can then be set to reveal details of
measurements made by the mobile at a selected instant or properties of the connection held by the
mobile at that instant.
Call Spider on a Map control, with Spider dialog in foreground
The Call Spider layer shows lines from the selected Call Segment to all measured cells within the Call
Segment. Best server at the start and end of the segment is indicated by green and red hashing of
the line. Order of the server is indicated by shade: the lighter the spider line the greater the Ec/Io.
Page 106
The Call Spider control presents generic call information, including:
Call ID indicating the identity of the call in the GEOperformance database.
Segment ID indicating the Call Segment index within the call. Next to the Segment ID is the start
time of the first and last segments in the call.
Segment Location indicating the geo-located latitude and longitude of the Call Segment.
The active Map control.
Call ID, Segment ID and Map Control are editable, allowing the selection of new calls and browsing
through the call segments of a call of interest. As the Spider dialog moves through the call segments
the Spider layer in the Map control updates to show the location of the new Call Segment.
Spider control tabs
Below this information are three tabs:
Properties providing detail of the Call Segment from the Call Table in an GEOperformance Table.
Spider providing details of the measured cells within the Call Segment.
Layer 3 allowing the launch of Layer 3 Drill Down.
Spider, Properties Tab

The Spider Properties tab of the Spider Tool shows the details of the Call Leg under consideration.
The contents depends on the RF technology in use by the call at the instance of the selected
segment.
UMTS Spider Properties
Reported fields include:
Property Description
Call Id The Call ID for the Call Segment
Technology The network technology upon which the call is carried.
IMSI The IMSI of the subscriber making the Call.
IMEI The IMEI of the device making the Call.
SV The Software Version of the device making the Call.
MCC The Mobile Country Code derived from the Subscriber IMEI.
MNC The Mobile Network Code derived from the Subscriber IMEI.
TAC The 8 digit TAC derived from the device IMEI.
Segment ID The ID of the Call Segment
Segment Start time Indicating the start time and date of the Call Segment.
Segment Duration (mS) Indicating the duration of the Call Segment in mS.
Page 107
Easting (m) The Easting of the geo-located location in the map grid format.
Northing (m) The Northing of the geo-located location in the map grid format.
RNC The serving RNC.
The name of the cell which is the best server at the start of the
Segment Start Cell Call Segment.
The name of the cell which is the best server at the end of the
Segment End Cell Call Segment.
The name of the cell which is the best server at the start of the
Cell Name Call Segment.
Downlink Category The downlink data category in use
Uplink Category The uplink data category in use
Power Class The power class of the mobile device
Release Indicator The release indicator value
Indicating the reason the Call Segment started. The

Establishment Reason for the first segment (Segment 0) indicates
Establishment Reason whether a call is originating or terminating. Within a call new
segments are started with Measurement Reports, 15 minute
periods (indicated as a Continuation) and RAB Changes.
Indicating the duration within the Call Segment with an active
Active Link (mS) RAB.
Indicating the aggregate duration of downlink active RAB. ie if
Active Set Link (mS) there is an active set of 2 cells for the entire duration of the call
segment this value will be twice the Active Link Ms.
Requested Service The requested service with a RAB change or active service.
Start Service The RAB at the start of the Call Segment.
End Service The RAB at the end of the Call Segment.
Technology The network technology upon which the call is carried.
Start Band The UMTS band the call segment started in
End Band The UMTS band the call segment ended in
Start ARFCN The UARFCN at the start of the Call Segment.
End ARFCN The UARFCN at the end of the Call Segment.
Combined Completion The Completion Code identified from a combination of Vendor

Code Specific, RANAP and RRC Completions Codes. this is generated by
Page 108
the following logic: if a Vendor Specific Completion Code is
present this value is selected, otherwise if a RANAP Completion
Code is present this value is selected, otherwise if a RRC
Completion Code is present this value is selected, otherwise the
Combined Completion Code is set to unknown.
Combined Network The Network View identified from a combination of Vendor

View Specific, RANAP and RRC Completion Codes.
Combined Completion The source of the Combined Completion Code: Vendor Specific,
Source RANAP or RRC.
RANAP Network View The Network View identified from the RANAP Completion Code.
RANAP Completion The RANAP Completion Code.

Code
RRC Network View The Network View identified from the RRC Completion Code.
RRC Completion Code The RRC Completion Code.
Vendor Specific The Network View identified from the Vendor Specific
Network View Completion Code.
Vendor Specific The Vendor Specific Completion Code.

Completion Code
IRAT Handown A flag set if an IRAT event occurs.
Inter Freq Hand Off A flag set if an IFHO event occurs
HSDCH To DCH A flag set if the RAB changes from HS data to R99 data.
HSDCH Cell Change A flag set if a HSDCH Cell change occurs.
Average Uplink Data The average data throughput in the uplink

Throughput
Average Downlink The average data throughput in the downlink

Data Throughput
Geolocation Type The type of geo-location used for the Call Segment
The confidence score of the call segment, a value between 0 and

Confidence 1. The higher the confidence score the more statistically accurate
the geo-location.
The name of the cell which is the average best server (i.e. highest
Best Cell Ec/Io) for the Call Segment.
Best Ec/Io The median Ec/Io for the Best Cell for the Call Segment
Page 109
Best RSCP The median RSCP for the Best Cell for the Call Segment
If there is insufficient information to geo-locate the Call Segment

Is Geolocated this field is set to False.
Active Set The name of the Cells present in the Active Set.
Active Set Group The number of Cells present in the Active Set.
The Service Group to which the Service of the Call Segment

Service Group belongs.
GSM Spider Properties

Call Id
Technology The Technology in Use
IMEI The IMEI of the Device
SV The Software Version of the Device
Start of Call The time of the start of the Call.
Segment Id The ID of the Call Segment within the Call.
Segment Start Time The time of the start of the Call Segment.
Segment Duration (mS) The Call Segment duration in milliseconds.
Easting (m) The Easting to the nearest meter.
Northing (m) The Northing to the nearest metre.
BSC The BSC controlling the Serving Cell.
Serving Cell The Serving Cell for the Call Segment.
Band The Frequency Band of the Serving Cell.
ARFCN The ARFCN for the call segment
The median measured RXLEV on the Downlink Traffic Channel in

TCH RxLev UL (dBm) dBm.
MS Power (dBm) The median measured RXLEV on the Uplink Traffic Channel in
Page 110
dBm.
A histogram of RXQUAL values observed on the Uplink.
RXQual UL Note: hovering over the histogram provides a larger view of the
histogram in a pop-up window.
A histogram of RXQUAL values observed on the Downlink.
RXQual DL Note: hovering over the histogram provides a larger view of the
histogram in a pop-up window.
BTS Power Reduction The value of BTS power reduction.

(dBm)
Pathloss UL (dBm) The Calculated Pathloss in the uplink
Average Uplink Data The Average Uplink Data Throughput in kbit/s

Throughput
Average Downlink The Average Downlink Data Throughput in kbit/s

Data Throughput
Geo-Location Type The type of geo-location for the Call Segment.
Confidence The confidence score for the geo-location.
Service The service within the Call Segment.
Channel The type of Channel used within the Call Segment.
Start Reason The reason the Call Segment starts.
End Reason The reason the Call Segment ends.
Call Segment Key message fields relating to call termination.

Messages
LTE Spider Properties

Field Description
Subscriber Parameters relating to the subscriber to whom this segment

relates.
IMEI The IMEI of the Subscriber
IMEISV The IMEISV of the Device
MCC The Mobile Country Code derived from the Subscriber IMEI.
Page 111
Field Description
MNC The Mobile Network Code derived from the Subscriber IMSI.
Connection Parameters relating to the connection in which the viewed

segment took place.
Connection Indicating the type of connection that has been made,

Establishment whether Mobile Originating Data, Mobile Originating
Signalling, Mobile Terminating, High Priority Access, etc
Connection ID The ID of the Connection.
Layer 3 Identifier The identifier used to for Layer 3
Segment Parameters relating to the segment itself
Segment Number The Segment Number
Start Start time for segment being viewed
Duration (sec) The Segment duration in seconds.
Start Reason The reason the Segment starts.
End Reason The reason the Segment starts.
Service Indicator of the type of service being used over the

connection
Location Parameters relating to the location of the segment
Easting (m) Location information for segment
Northing (m) Location information for segment
Network Parameters relating to the network and serving cell used

during the segment
GlobalCellID The GlobalCellID for the segment
TAC Tracking Area Code of the serving cell used during the
segment.
eNodeB Name of the eNodeB that controls the serving cell used during
the segment.
Cell The serving cell used during the segment.
Frequency Band The Frequency Band used during the segment.
Page 112
Field Description
Uplink Channel The uplink EARFCN for the segment.

Number
Downlink Channel The downlink EARFCN for the segment.

Number
Measurement Parameters relating to measurements of the serving cell used

during the segment
CQI Channel Quality Indicator. A histogram showing counts of

each CQI level reported during the segment.
Rank Rank Indicator. A histogram showing counts of each RI value

reported during the segment.
Rank 1 First Rank Indicator. A histogram showing counts of each RI1

value reported during the segment.
Rank 2 Second Rank Indicator. A histogram showing counts of each

RI2 value reported during the segment.
eRAB N Parameters relating to a Radio Access Bearer in use during the

segment. Note that there may be multiple eRABs in use within
a segment.
QCI QoS Class Indicator. Indicates the quality of service requested

for the bearer.
Bearer Type Indicates whether this bearer is carrying Data (DRB) or

Signalling (SRB).
Maximum Downlink Bit Highest data rate achieved during downlink transmissions on
Rate (kbit/s) this bearer during the segment
Maximum Uplink Bit Highest data rate achieved during uplink transmissions on this
Rate (kbit/s) bearer during the segment
Downlink Volume (kbit) Volume of data transmitted on the downlink on this bearer
during the segment.
Downlink Volume of data transmitted on the downlink on this bearer

Acknowledged Volume during the segment for which acknowledgments have been
(kbit) received by the serving cell.
Uplink Volume (kbit) Volume of data transmitted on the uplink on this bearer
during the segment.
Downlink Duration Time spent transmitting data on the downlink on this bearer
(sec) during this segment.
Page 113
Field Description
Uplink Duration (sec) Time spent transmitting data on the uplink on this bearer
during this segment.
Average Downlink RLC Average delay experienced by packets in the RLC prior to
Delay (ms) transmission on the downlink.
Average Downlink Average delay experienced within the scheduler prior to

Latency (ms) transmission on the downlink.
Maximum Uplink Maximum uplink throughput in kbit/s

Throughput (kbit/s)
Maximum Downlink Maximum downlink throughput in kbit/s

Throughput (kbit/s)
Measurement N Parameters relating to Measurement Reports issued by the

mobile during the segment. Note there may be multiple
Measurements made in a segment, one for each measured
cell.
GlobalCellID The GlobalCellID for the measured cell.
Cell Name of the cell represented in this measurement report.
Physical Cell Id Physical Cell Identifier (PCI) of the measured cell.
RSRP Reference Signal Received Power level recorded from the

measured cell
RSRQ Reference Signal Received Quality level recorded from the

measured cell
Page 114
Spider, Spider Tab
The Spider tab of the Spider Tool shows the measurement details of the cells which are measured
within the Call Segment being investigated.
Spider control, Spider tab
Depending on the technology different values are reported, for example in UMTS the Ec/Io and
Signal Strength values are reported, taken as the median values observed during the Cell Segment. In
GSM, the median BCCH RXLEV is reported and in LTE the RSRP and RSRQ values are displayed for
each measured cell.
4.2.2 Layer 3 Drill Down

The Layer 3 Drill Down tool is an Advanced Feature of GEOperformance. It provides a method of
Call Drill Down Analysis to view sequences of Layer 3 and other messages observed during the
progress of a call. Layer 3 Drill Down reloads the raw trace files to present information on a per
message level, as well as through charts and time series.
The drill down is based upon the reloaded raw trace data, reparsing the 3GPP messages and vendor
specific events and synchronizing with the Call Segments in the database.
Note: The retention period for the raw trace information may be less than for the Call Table in the
database.
Launching the Layer 3 Functionality

There are two ways to launch the Layer 3 Drill Down: from a Spider dialog, or from a Table control.
Launch from the Spider dialog
On the Layer 3 tab of the Spider dialog click on Retrieve Layer 3 Messages button to start the
retrieval process:
Spider dialog Layer 3 tab
It is possible to define whether a period at the start or end of the call is retrieved, or whether all the
call is retrieved.
Page 115
Launch from a Table control
Right-clicking on a cell in a Table control that contains the Id of calls, connections, segments will
present a Show Call Drilldown option. Selecting this will retrieve Layer 3 message data to the Spider
dialog :
Launching L3 Drilldown from a Table
Layout of the Layer 3 Control

When the Layer 3 Drill Down messages have been retrieved and presented in a Spider tool, you will
be presented with the default Layer 3 layout:
Loaded L3 data
At the top of the Layer 3 tab is the Layer 3 toolbar. The Layer 3 toolbar allows the user to:
Add new charts (Line, Bar or Time Series)
Display Layer 3 information in the map
Play back a call on the map, using the slider to change speed
Save and load Layer 3 layouts
Configure Layer 3 Display Options
Below the toolbar is the main chart area:
To create a new chart, double-click or drag and drop one of the 3 chart icons at the left of the
toolbar (Line chart, Bar chart or Event chart)
Page 116
An additional chart area can be made visible by dragging down the splitter bar at the top of the
main chart area, allowing configuration of the main chart area
The Time indicator at the bottom of the main chart area shows the time period of the call, When
your mouse cursor passes over the charts, an indication of the time (and sometimes value on the
y-axis) is shown
L3 chart tooltip
The table of Layer 3 messages is located at the bottom of the display:

The Layer 3 Message table is a standard GEOperformance table, with the same sorting, filtering,
export and color scheme options as other GEOperformance Table controls
The toolbar is hidden by default. To view it, right-click on a column header or cell and select
Show Toolbar
Layer 3 Charts
The Layer 3 Drill Down view of the Spider tool may display 3 different styles of charts: Line charts,
Bar charts and Event charts. All charts share a similar layout and functionality:
Layer 3 chart components
The title combo box in the top-left shows the currently displayed data. Choose from the dropdown
to change the data displayed.
Once you have several charts in the chart area of a Layer 3 Control you can move them up and
down to rearrange their order by clicking and dragging the ‘drag chart’ icon, and dragging the chart
up or down.
The Close button deletes the chart from the layout.
For those charts that have several available series (e.g. members of the active set and also a list of
cells), press the ‘Add/Remove…’ button to choose from the available chart series.
Page 117
To zoom in to a certain area of a chart to see more detail, keeping CTRL pressed on the keyboard,
delineate an area with the mouse. When the mouse is released, the chart zooms to the selected
area allowing you to see the data more clearly:
Zooming into a chart - before and after
When zoomed in, simply clicking and dragging with the mouse cursor will allow you to pan the chart
from left to right and up and down.
Pressing Show All Time, Show All Values and Show Full Extent buttons will revert the chart to its
original extents (either on the x-axis, y-axis or both).
All the charts are synchronized by their x-axes, meaning if you zoom in or pan in one chart, the other
charts automatically show the same time period. This allows you to compare values in several
charts at the same time.
Line Charts
The set of Layer 3 Line Charts that may be displayed in the chart area of a Layer 3 Drill Down will
depend on the RF technology under consideration.
For UMTS there are a number of different types of Line chart to choose from, the main ones
include:
Ec/N0
A point from each measurement report message that contains Ec/N0 values.
Ec/No Layer 3 Line Chart
RSCP
A point from each measurement report message that contains RSCP values
RSCP Layer 3 Line Chart
Page 118
Data Throughputs
A point for each message that contains data throughput information.
4 series: Uplink, Downlink, Uplink User and Downlink User
Data Throughputs Layer 3 Line Chart
Active Set Size

Shows the active set size during the call.
A point for each time the value changes.
Active Set Size Layer 3 Line Chart
Frequency Band
Shows the frequency band of the first member of the active set during the call.
Frequency Band Layer 3 Line Chart
UE Transmitter Power
User Equipment Transmitter Power.
A point for each measurement report message that contains UE Tx Power information.
UE TX Power Layer 3 Line Chart
ARFCN
Carrier frequency.
A point for each time the ARFCN changes.
ARFCN Layer 3 Line Chart
Other UMTS charts include, Tm (Time difference between Call Segments), and Delta.
Page 119
For GSM there are a number of different types of Line chart to choose from, these include:
TCH RXLEV
A point from each measurement report message that contains signal strength values
measured on the call's TCH. There are two options DL or UL RXLEV.
TCH RXLEV Layer 3 Line Chart
BCCH RXLEV
A point from each measurement report message that contains signal strength values
measured on the serving or neighbor cells' BCCH
BCCH RXLEV Layer 3 Line Chart
MS Power
A point for each message that contains that contains MS Tx Power information.
MS Power Layer 3 Line Chart
Timing Advance
A point for each message that contains that contains MS Timing Advance information.
Timing Advance Layer 3 Line Chart
RXQUAL UL
A point for each measurement report message that contains RXQUAL information
measured in the uplink.
RXQUAL UL Layer 3 Line Chart
RXQUAL DL
A point for each measurement report message that contains RXQUAL information
measured in the downlink.
RXQUAL DL Layer 3 Line Chart
Page 120
Volume UL
A point for each measurement report message that contains data transfer volumes
reported in the uplink.
Volume UL Layer 3 Line Chart
Volume DL
reported in the downlink.
Volume DL Layer 3 Line Chart
Frequency Band
Shows the frequency band of the first member of the active set during the call.
Frequency Band Layer 3 Line Chart
For LTE there are s number of different types of Line chart to choose from, these include:
RSRP
A point from each measurement report message that contains RSRP.
RSRP Layer 3 Line Chart
RSRQ
A point from each measurement report message that contains RSRQ.
RSRQ Layer 3 Line Chart
Page 121
Median CQI
A point for each message that contains that contains Median CQI.
Median CQI Layer 3 Line Chart
Max Bit Rate DL

A point for each message that contains that contains downlink Max Bite Rate.
Max Bit Rate DL Layer 3 Line Chart
Max Bit Rate UL

A point for each message that contains that contains uplink Max Bite Rate.
Max Bit Rate UL Layer 3 Line Chart
Volume DL
Volume DL Layer 3 Line Chart
Ack Volume DL
Ack Volume DL Layer 3 Line Chart
Volume UL
reported in the uplink.
Volume UL Layer 3 Line Chart
Page 122
Avg RLC Delay DL
Shows the average RLC delay in the downlink for the eRAB(s).
Avg RLC Delay DL Layer 3 Line Chart
Avg Latency DL
Shows the average downlink latency for the eRAB(s).
Avg Latency DL Layer 3 Line Chart
Throughput UL
Shows the uplink throughput for the eRAB(s).
Throughput UL Layer 3 Line Chart
Throughput DL
Shows the downlink throughput for the eRAB(s).
Throughput DL Layer 3 Line Chart
Formatting the Line Series

Double-click a series (its entry in the right-hand-side of charts) or right-click the series entry and
choose ‘Format Chart Series’ to show the Format Chart Series dialog.
Format Chart Series dialog
You can change the color, line thickness, dash style, whether the marker is shown, and the marker
size.
Page 123
Bar Charts
The set of Layer 3 Bar Charts that may be displayed in the chart area of a Layer 3 Drill Down will
depend on the RF technology under consideration.
For UMTS there are a number of different types of Bar chart to display, the main ones include:
Ec/N0
Shows the Ec/N0 values (using colourscheme) for the active set members and the
individual cells.
Ec/No Layer 3 Bar Chart
RSCP
Shows the RSCP values (using colourscheme) for the active set members and the
individual cells.
RSCP Layer 3 Bar Chart
Active Set by Cell

For each Cell involved in the L3 messages, shows its position in the active set over time.
A color is used to denote its position.
Active Set by Cell Layer 3 Bar Chart
Active Set by Position

For each active set position, shows which Cells were in that position at a given time.
Active Set by Position Layer 3 Bar Chart
Data Throughputs
Show the data volume present for each active set member and Cell.
4 series: Downlink, Downlink User, Uplink and Uplink User variations.
Data Throughputs Layer 3 Bar Chart
Page 124
Bearer Type
Shows the bearer type (service group) active during the call. Multiple bearers can be
active at the same time.
Available bearers: Voice, LSData, HSData, HSPA+, MultiRAB, Idle.
Bearer Type Layer 3 Bar Chart
ARFCN
Shows the carrier frequency of the first cell in the active set.
Frequency Band Layer 3 Bar Chart
UE Transmitter Power
Shows the User Equipment Transmitter Power over time, using a colourscheme.
UE TX Power Layer 3 Bar Chart
For GSM there are a number different types of Bar chart to choose from, the main ones include:
TCH RXLEV
Shows the signal strength values measured on the call's TCH for each cell visited during
the call. This is available for both the UL and DL TCH RXLEV.
TCH RXLEV Layer 3 Bar Chart
BCCH RXLEV
Shows signal strength values measured on the serving or neighbor cells' BCCH for each
cell observed during the call.
BCCH RXLEV Layer 3 Bar Chart
Page 125
MS Power
Shows the TX Power levels used by the mobile to transmit to each cell visited during the
call.
MS Power Layer 3 Bar Chart
Timing Advance
Shows the Timing Advance values used by the mobile to transmit to each cell visited
during the call.
Timing Advance Layer 3 Bar Chart
RXQUAL UL
Shows the RXQUAL values measured on the call's Uplink TCH for each cell visited during
the call.
RXQUAL UL Layer 3 Bar Chart
RXQUAL DL
Shows the RXQUAL values measured on the call's Downlink TCH for each cell visited
during the call.
RXQUAL DL Layer 3 Bar Chart
Volume UL
Shows the uplink data transfer volumes reported during the call to each cell visited during
the call.
Volume UL Layer 3 Bar Chart
Volume DL
Shows the downlink data transfer volumes reported during the call to each cell visited
during the call.
Volume DL Layer 3 Bar Chart
Page 126
Band
Shows the frequency bands used to connect to each cell visited during the call.
Frequency Band Layer 3 Bar Chart
For LTE there are a number of different types of Bar chart to display, the main ones include:
RSRP
Shows RSRP for the serving and neighboring cells.
RSRP Layer 3 Bar Chart
RSRQ
Shows RSRQ for the serving and neighboring cells.
RSRQ Layer 3 Bar Chart
Median CQI
Shows Median CQI for serving cell.
Median CQI Layer 3 Line Chart
Max Bit Rate DL

Shows downlink Max Bite Rate.
Max Bit Rate DL Layer 3 Bar Chart
Max Bit Rate UL

Shows uplink Max Bite Rate.
Max Bit Rate UL Layer 3 Bar Chart
Page 127
Volume DL
Shows data transfer volumes reported in the downlink.
Volume DL Layer 3 Bar Chart
Ack Volume DL
Shows data transfer volumes reported in the downlink.
Ack Volume DL Layer 3 Bar Chart
Volume UL
Shows data transfer volumes reported in the uplink.
Volume UL Layer 3 Bar Chart
Avg RLC Delay DL

Shows the average RLC delay in the downlink for the eRAB(s).
Avg RLC Delay DL Layer 3 Bar Chart
Avg Latency DL
Shows the average downlink latency for the eRAB(s).
Avg Latency DL Layer 3 Bar Chart
Throughput UL
Shows the uplink throughput for the eRAB(s).
Throughput UL Layer 3 Bar Chart
Page 128
Throughput DL
Shows the downlink throughput for the eRAB(s).
Throughput DL Layer 3 Bar Chart
GEOperformance Color Schemes can be applied to Layer 3 Bar charts by dragging onto the Color
Scheme icon. The active Color Scheme can be seen by hovering over the chart's Color Scheme icon.
Event Charts
The Event Chart that may be displayed in the chart area of a Layer 3 Drill Down displays a point for
each individual Layer 3 event (each row in the Layer 3 Message table). They are divided into
protocols. Hovering over each point displays the message description and the time of the message.
Layer 3 Event Chart for UMTS
Layer 3 Event Chart for GSM
Layer 3 Event Chart for LTE
Filtering the Event Chart and Table

To help distinguish between the different points, any filtering applied to the message table is
automatically applied to Event charts. This can help you focus just on the events you are interested
in.
Note: If the toolbar is not visible activate using the right mouse menu on the Column heading.
Filtering the Layer 3 Message table
Effect of Filtering on the Event Chart
Page 129
Layer 3 Message Table
The Layer 3 Message table included in the Layer 3 Drill Down view of the Spider tool allows the user
to scroll through the call under investigation. The table contains the following Columns:
View allows the user to bring up the Layer 3 Message Details dialog by clicking on the icon,
containing field and message information.
Time is the time the event occurred.
Time Difference indicated the time since the previous message.
Technology indicates, GSM, UMTS or LTE.
Protocol indicates which 3GPP protocol or vendor Specific event type the message relates to.
Supported 3GPP protocols include RRC, RANAP, NBAP, RPMO and GPEH.
Message indicates the message type, for example Measurement Report
Direction indicates whether the message was from UE to Network (Uplink) or Network to UE
(Downlink).
Serving Cell(s) identifies the service cell or cells
Active Service identifies the service from the technology Service list
Source Config and Target Config indicate the before and after RAB configuration. For Ericsson
equipment, this also indicates whether an HSPA+ service was used
Active Set indicates the cells in the active set during the message
Details provides a tooltip of the message details
Fields Table provides a tooltip of parsed information from the message
Fields String provides a searchable entry of parsed information from the message
The Layer 3 Message table is a standard GEOperformance table, with the same filtering, coloring,
sorting and export options as a Table control
Page 130
Layer 3 Message Details
The Layer 3 Message Details dialog provides another option for stepping through a call.
Layer 3 Message Details dialog
The Navigation Control on the top right of the dialog allows the user to step forwards and
backwards through the call. The Fields table provides the key parsed information. The Details pane
contains fuller message details.
In addition, for ASN1 messages, the Message Details are shown in a tree view that can be expanded,
contracted or searched.
Messages that are subject to ASN1 decoding and can be viewed as a tree include LTERRC, NAS,
NBAP, RANAP, RNSAP, RRC, S1 and some vendor-specific messages.
Map Display
As well as displaying the Layer 3 Drill Down information in Layer 3 charts and in the Layer 3 Message
table, you can show the call geographically in a Map control (the same Map control that the Spider
layer appears in).
Layer 3 messages are geo-located based upon interpolation between Call Segment locations of the
call.
Note: This may result in straight lines in the geo-location.
To show the Layer 3 map display, click on the Show button in the Layer 3 toolbar. Choose from one
of the 12 types (in the left-hand drop down box). Some of the types require you to choose a sub-
choice (such as a member of the Active Set, or a cell) – these choices are in the right-hand drop
down:
Layer 3 - Map Display Details

Layer 3 - Map Display Options
Page 131
Layer 3 Map Display Types
Depending on the technology there different ways of coloring these points on a map, some
examples are illustrated here:
Time From Start of
Call
Shows a point for each
Layer 3 message.
Layer 3 Map Display Time from Start of Call
Ec/No
measurement report
message that contains
an Ec/No measurement.
You must choose which
series to view (a position
in the Active Set, or a
specific Cell).
Layer 3 Map Display Ec/No
RSCP Similar screenshot to Ec/No above, just a different Color Scheme.

measurement report
message that contains
an RSCP measurement.
specific Cell).
UE Transmitter Similar screenshot to Ec/No above, just a different Color Scheme.

Power
measurement report
message that contains a
User Equipment
Transmitter Power
value.
Page 132
4 x Data Throughputs
message that contains a
data volume
measurement.
Can be one of:
- Download Data
Throughput
- Download User Data
Throughput
- Uplink Data
Layer 3 Map Display Data Throughputs
Throughput
- Uplink User Data
Throughput
specific Cell).
Active Set Size

Layer 3 message,
colored by the number
of Cells in its active set.
Layer 3 Map Display Active Set Size
Bearer Type
location of a call
segment, coloring the
point by the appropriate
bearer type.
If there is more than one
bearer type per call
segment (e.g. Voice and
HS Data) the point will
be striped with the
appropriate colors.
Page 133
Layer 3 Map Display Bearer Type
Best Server
Layer 3 message,
colored by best server
for that message.
The colors are currently
not the same as the best
server analysis grid.
Layer 3 Map Display Best Server
Events Similar screenshot to the Active Set Size above, just a different Color
Shows a point for each Scheme.
Layer 3 message,
colored by protocol.
Similar to the Events
Chart, if you filter the
Layer 3 message table,
the Events display in the
map will also be filtered,
just showing you the
visible items in the table.
Selection Synchronisation
As an aid to navigating your way around the messages in a Layer 3 Drill Down, selected messages
are synchronized across the Layer 3 charts, Layer 3 Message table and Layer 3 Map display.
Selecting a message in one of the displays will also select the message in the others.
Selected Messages in Charts
A selected message in a chart is shown by a vertical line (colored in the Protocol color of the
message). To select a message from the chart, click on the message marker, where available (the
bar charts do not have markers). You can only select one message at a time from within a chart.
Selection bar in Line chart
Selected Messages in Tables

Selected messages are shown with dark-blue shading (to stand out from the row coloring). To
Page 134
select a message in the message table, just select at least one cell in that message. Multiple
messages can be selected by holding down CTRL or SHIFT when selecting cells.
Selection in Layer 3 Message table
Selected Messages in the Layer 3 Map

Selected messages are shown with a glowing ring.
Selection in Layer 3 Map display
To select a message in the Layer 3 map display make sure the Select mode is active in the map
control and click on the message. Use CTRL or SHIFT to select multiple messages.
Saving/Loading Layer 3 Layouts

To save you having to drag and arrange the Layout of the Layer 3 Control each Layer 3 Drill Down
session, there is a facility to save the layout of the charts to file, which can then be loaded back in.
For each chart, it saves its type (line, bar or event), position (in main area or in top area), and it’s
content type (e.g. Ec/N0, BCCH RXLEV, etc).
To save a layout, click on the Save Layout button in the Layer 3 toolbar and save the current layout
to a location in the Data Explorer.
Save Layout button
To load a previously saved layout, either press the Open Layout button in the Layer 3 toolbar, or
drag a Layer 3 layout item from the Data Explorer into the Layer 3 chart area, which will populate
the chart area with the saved layout.
Layer 3 Display Options

There are various ways to configure the Layer 3 display for a Layer 3 Drill Down session. These are
accessed in the Layer 3 page in the main GEOperformance Options dialog. You can also show these
options by pressing the Layer 3 Display Options button in the toolbar.
Layer 3 Display Options button
Page 135
Layer 3 Options - example of UMTS
You can choose a Layer 3 layout as the default layout. This layout will be used to populate the
Layer 3 control when you initially launch it, rather than it appearing empty.
You can choose to enable/disable the synchronizing of the Event Charts and Event Map Display with
the Layer 3 Message table contents: when applying filters to the Layer 3 Message table it will/won’t
affect the Event displays.
Note: Different options are available for different RF technologies
For UMTS:
You can choose 1 of 3 ways to display cell identities:
Label
Scrambling Code
Label (Scrambling Code) – the label followed by the Scrambling Code.
The order of the active set can be chosen from one of two ways:
Using the measured Ec/No of the cells – ordered strongest to weakest (this is the default)
Using the reported order in the Layer 3 messages.
For GSM:
You can choose 1 of 3 ways to display cell identities:
Label
BCCH ARFCN (BSIC)
Label BCCH ARFCN (BSIC)
For LTE:
You can choose only 1 way to display cell identities:
Label
4.3 RF Network Optimization

GEOperformance includes a number of Advanced Features to assist with RF Network Optimization
and Management. Capabilities in GEOperformance include:
Missing Neighbor: An analysis that shows missing GSM or UMTS cells.
Problem Identification: A module that identifies areas in the network with below threshold KPI
performance.
Page 136
Neighbor Planning: A module that provides automated Neighbor Planning.
GSM Frequency Reuse: A set of analyses to investigate both BCCH and TCH Co-Channel and
Adjacent Channel Overlap.
Scrambling Code Tuning: A set of analyses that identify Scrambling Code conflicts and potential
solutions.
Antenna Tuning: A set of analyses that model the effect of antenna and power changes at a cell.
Export to ariesoACP: Exports geo-located traffic and RF measurement data to ariesoACP for use
in cell planning.
Note: These features are only available if your system has the appropriate licenses. You can see
which features are licensed in your installation from the Help tab, by clicking About > License Info.
Note: Scrambling Code Tuning not available for GSM.
4.3.1 Missing Neighbor

GEOperformance includes a simple Missing Neighbor analysis for both GSM and UMTS.
Missing Neighbor Analysis (GSM)

Alongside Automatic Neighbor Planning it is possible to run a simple analysis to identify Missing GSM
Neighbors in GEOperformance.
The Missing Neighbors analysis reports back the number of instances where a missing neighbor is
detected. This is based on a number of factors which relate to a previous call drop and a
subsequent Call Re-establishment. To run the analyses drag the Missing Neighbors analyses (from
the GSM/Optimization folder) to the Presentation Canvas. For GSM this analyses requires a cell or
BSC to be selected as the filter. The screen shot below an example analysis.
Missing Neighbor analysis - GSM
The Missing Neighbor analysis reports identifies the source and target information, as well as the
distance and number of Call Establishments at Missing Cell.
Page 137
Missing Neighbor Analysis (UMTS)
Alongside Automatic Neighbor Planning it is possible to run a simple analysis to identify Missing
UMTS Neighbors in GEOperformance.
The Missing Neighbors analysis reports back the number of instances where a 1A event is observed
for a Target Cell, but there is no subsequent addition to the active set within 10 seconds. The
Missing Neighbors analysis can be run simply by dragging the analysis from the Data Explorer
(UMTS/Optimization folder) to the Presentation Canvas. For UMTS this analyses requires a cell or
RNC to be selected as the filter.
Missing Neighbor analysis - UMTS
The Missing Neighbor analysis reports back both the frequency and number of instances that the
Missing Neighbor event occurs.
Note: The Missing Neighbors analysis is not filtered by the active Neighbor List. As a result it is
possible to identify instance where a Neighbor which is already on the Neighbor List experiences a
Missing Neighbor event. Such instances may result due to congestion, incorrect priorities or other
soft handover failures.
4.3.2 Neighbor Planning

Neighbor Planning in GEOperformance allows the user to review the sets of neighbor cells identified
as targets for handovers from each cell in the network, and to identify changes to the Neighbor Plan
to improve the performance of the network.
There are several types of Automatic Neighbor Planning that may be performed; Intra-frequency
and Inter-frequency within UMTS networks, Intra-technology within GSM networks and Inter-
technology from UMTS to GSM and from GSM to UMTS. The process is very similar in each case,
however the underlying algorithms differ slightly. For example, Intra-frequency UMTS Neighbor
Planning is based upon detailed Call Table information, every Call Segment in the Filter is examined
to identify relationships between cells. In contrast Inter-frequency and Inter-technology Neighbor
Planning is based upon the comparison of cell service areas calculated from the Call Table,
normalized by where such handovers occur.
If your system has the Automatic Neighbor Relations (ANR) license installed, it is also possible to
actuate a UMTS neighbor plan to the network from within GEOperformance.
The active network neighbor plan is imported into GEOperformance as part of the automatic
network configuration load. This plan can be visualized using the Active Neighbors List analysis or
using the Spider dialog and Spider layer. Automatic Neighbor Planning functionality can be found via
the Neighbor Planning button under the Optimization ribbon. The button presents a choice of
Page 138
neighbor planning approach to take, whether GSM, UMTS or IRAT. Planning itself then take place
within a Wizard-like user interface that uses a sequence of steps to accumulate the data necessary
to produce the require neighbor plans.
This process follows a basic pattern:
Time Range Set the time range over which call data will be used when
calculation neighbors
Cells Set the geographic area that contains the cells to be given
neighbor lists
Frequency For UMTS Neighbor Planning, choose whether to calculate

Selection Intra-frequency or Inter-frequency relationships. For Inter-
frequency neighbors, identify the target ARFCNs that may be
referenced by each source ARFCN
Parameters Set parameters that govern how neighbor entries will be

decided
Start Calculation Begin the calculation of neighbor lists for the selected cells
View The Plan Once calculated, the plan can be viewed in a Neighbor Plan
control
Alongside Automatic Neighbor Planning it is possible to run Missing Neighbor analysis to gain a quick
appreciation of missing neighbors in the network.
Scenarios
UMTS Neighbor Planning exercise settings can be saved for later use. These saved settings are
called scenarios.
To load a scenario, select a scenario from the Load a scenario drop-down list.
To create a scenario:
1. Enter a name for the scenario in the Save a scenario box. You can use the Comments box to
describe the scenario or when it should be used
2. Click Save
3. Continue through the Neighbor Planning process, setting time ranges and parameters as normal
4. (Optional) Run the Neighbor Planning exercise
5. Close the Neighbor Planning wizard. On the pop-up prompt, click Yes to save your changes
Scenarios are saved to GEOperformance's Mongo database. They are not available as Windows
files.
Time Range
The Time Range page of the Neighbor Planning wizard allows the user to set the time period over
which the plan will be created:
Page 139
The time range identifies the extents of call data that will be used to generate neighbor relations.
Time periods can be set according to a selected variable (e.g. Loaded Data Date), according to a
specific set of dates (e.g. from 10th November until 16th November) or according to a relative time
period (e.g. using the last 5 days). The choice is made via the Edit button which presents the
following dialog:
Neighbor Planning wizard - Edit Time Period
Tip: Typically a time period of two weeks is recommended in order to capture weekly traffic
fluctuations and avoid anomalous recommendations due to specific events.
Choose the Cells

The Cells page of the Neighbor Planning wizard allows the user to select the cells for which
Neighbor Plans will be created:
Neighbor Planning wizard - UMTS Cells page
Select the required cells by specifying, or dragging onto the wizard, a Geographic Area as a Variable,
Polygon or Map Bounds. The algorithm will restrict its calculations to cells within this area. The only
difference for GSM Cells is that the layers (ARFCNs) are not displayed. IRAT Cells is a combination of
GSM and UMTS cells.
Note: Cells outside this area can be considered as neighbors of the selected cells.
With UMTS networks, if the network has changed since network data was last loaded you will be
prompted to reload. You do not have to reload the network data in order to calculate a neighbor
plan, but the neighbor plan will not be relevant to the current network and you will not be able to
actuate it.
Page 140
Frequency Selection
Use the Frequency Selection page of the Neighbor Planning wizard choose whether to consider
Intra-Frequency or Inter-Frequency neighbor relations. The user interface updates depending on
which you choose.
Intra-Frequency: choose which carriers to calculate lists for
Inter-Frequency: choose the source-target carrier pairs to calculate lists for. The target ARFCN is
used to supply neighbor candidates for cells in the source ARFCN. So in the row for each carrier
you want to plan lists for, check the cell corresponding to the target carrier that should contribute
cells to the lists
Inter-Frequency selection. In this example, lists are being planned for carriers 4437 and 10763
Set the Parameters

The Parameters page of the Neighbor Planning wizard is different depending on the type of
technology the neighbor plan is intended for (UMTS, GSM or IRAT), but appears something like this:
Page 141
Neighbor Planning Wizard UMTS Parameters tab
Use the parameters page to specify the constraints and parameters for the planning exercise.
UMTS Parameters for determining inter-frequency or intra-frequency

relationships between UMTS cells
GSM Parameters for determining relationships between GSM cells
IRAT Parameters for determining UMTS-to-GSM and GSM-to-UMTS

neighbor relationships
When starting a calculation the chosen parameters are stored and will be used as the initial settings
next time the wizard is run. If you wish to reset to the installed defaults, just press the Reset from
Defaults button.
Parameters (UMTS)
For UMTS Neighbor Planning, the following parameters and constraints can be defined:
Force addition of Forces all cells of any particular site to be included as neighbors
co-sited cells in the plan. If they are not currently in the Neighbor List they
will be added
Force reciprocal Forces relationships such that, if a target cell appears on the
relationships source cell's neighbor list then the source cell must appear on
the target cell's list.
However, the Max neighbor list size takes priority over this
parameter. If adding a cell would cause the neighbor list to
exceed this size, the cell will not be added
Page 142
Ec/Io threshold Sets the minimum Ec/Io value for pilots from a pair of cells in
an observation to contribute to the ranking of neighbors. The
implication of this value is that for a given Map bin or Call
Segment the measured values for both cells must exceed this
value to add to the score. This value must be within the valid
range of Ec/Io, with a default of -15dB
New neighbor Increases the priority of missing neighbors (i.e. neighbors not in
scale factor the existing neighbor list). This compensates for the lower
number of observations of missing neighbors, because UEs
search for them less often. This is a floating point value greater
than or equal to 1 (the default), where 1 means no increased
consideration of missing neighbors
Cumulative Limits the reported calculated neighbors. If the Energy

neighbor score contribution of a Source/Target cells pair to the Energy
limit cumulation distribution function for a Source cell is at a level
above than this threshold the relationship is ignored to remove
measurement noise This constraint is a floating point value
between 0.0 and 1.0, with a default of 0.99 (i.e. the top 99% of
observed neighbor relations are considered
Keep remove Forces neighbor planning to keep any nearby neighbors.

neighbors in close
Proximity distance: The distance below which neighbors are
proximity
considered to be in close proximity. The default is 250 m
Keep neighbors for Prevents rarely-used neighbor relations being removed from a
cells where one source cell where a single target cell dominates the neighbor
target dominates list.
Signal sum threshold: The percentage of signal sum that
comes from a single neighbor. Cells with this percentage or
greater coming from a single neighbor cell will never have
cells removed from their neighbor lists
Keep neighbors to IRAT only. Ensures that the removal of low-ranking neighbors
maintain target does not result in a very small neighbor list for some cells,
list length which may lead to an increase in dropped calls.
Target neighbor list length: The minimum length for neighbor
lists. Where the removal of neighbors would reduce the list
below this length, the best of the neighbors are added back
to the list. Note that the neighbor list for some cells may still
be shorter than this length if the number of valid neighbors is
too low
Keep neighbors Ensure that cells with high propagation delays do not have
with cells for neighbors removed, and are not removed as neighbors. Cells
excessive delays with high propagation delays are often in buildings or tunnels,
and may have important but rarely-used neighbor relations that
should be kept
Page 143
Max neighbor Set a distance beyond which a cell will not be added to the
distance for adds neighbor list. You can set separate values for Outdoor and
Indoor cells. Distances are in km, with a default of 50km
(Outdoor) and 1km (Indoor)
Max number of Limits the number of neighbors of each type that each cell can
neighbors per cell have.
Observed relationships beyond this size of list will not be
reported, and if the existing list is greater than this value
suggestions for Neighbor relations to remove will be made.
If the maximum number of neighbors of a type is zero, the cell
will be omitted from neighbor plans of that type. For example,
if a cell currently has an inter-carrier neighbor list that is the
same size as the maximum for inter-carrier plus intra-carrier
neighbors, the practical list length available for intra-carrier
neighbors is zero. That cell would therefore not be included in
calculations for an intra-carrier neighbor plan
Parameters (IRAT)
For IRAT Neighbor Planning, the following parameters and constraints can be defined:
Min # call Sets a limit on the number of call segments that should be seen
segments to at a bin location for that bin to be considered within the
consider neighbor planning algorithm. Bins with fewer call segments
than this limit will be ignored
Keep neighbors in Forces neighbor planning to keep any nearby neighbors.

close proximity
Proximity distance: The distance below which neighbors are
considered to be in close proximity. The default is 250 m
GSM Source Layer Specify target thresholds for RXQUAL and/or RXLEV levels
beyond which GSM cells should begin searching for UMTS cells
as neighbors. For each parameter the user may indicate the
threshold value and identify whether to find values above or
below this target threshold. They may also indicate whether
one or two targets should be considered and, if two, whether
either or both must be met
UMTS Target Identify the UMTS ARFCN carriers that may be considered
Carrier when searching for target cells to be included in the GSM cells'
neighbor lists
UMTS Source Specify target thresholds for Ec/Io and/or RSCP levels beyond
Layer which UMTS cells should begin searching for GSM cells as
neighbors. For each parameter the user may indicate the
threshold value and identify whether to find values above or
below this target threshold. They may also indicate whether
one or two targets should be considered and, if two, whether
either or both must be met
Page 144
GSM Target Band Identify the GSM frequency bands that may be considered
when searching for target cells to be included in the UMTS cells'
neighbor lists
distances for adds neighbor list. You can set separate values for Outdoor and
Max number of Limits the number of neighbors of each type that each cell can
neighbors per cell have.
Observed relationships beyond this size of list will not be
suggestions for Neighbor relations to remove will be made.
Parameters (GSM)
For GSM Neighbor Planning, the following parameters and constraints can be defined:
Force co-sited cells Forces all cells of any particular site to be included as neighbors
in the plan. If they are not currently in the Neighbor List they
will be added
Force reciprocal Forces relationships such that, if a target cell appears on the
relationships source cell's neighbor list then the source cell must appear on
the target cell's list
Max neighbor list Constrains the number of neighbor list entries for each cells.
size Observed relationships beyond this size of list will not be
suggestions for Neighbor relations to remove will be made. This
must be a positive integer value greater than or equal to 1, with
a default of 20
Min # call Sets a limit on the number of call segments that should be seen
segments to at a bin location for that pixel to be considered within the
consider neighbor planning algorithm. Pixels with fewer call segments
than this limit will be ignored.
distances for adds neighbor list. You can set separate values for Outdoor and
Good neighbors Hand-over threshold: Identifies a threshold at which a target

cell will be considered as a neighbor for a source cell. Bins at
which the target cell has a signal strength that is within this
level of the source cell's signal will be counted towards the
score that ranks the target cell as a neighbor of the source
cell
Min % bins passing hand-over criteria: Sets a limit on the
number of bins that need to be counted within the hand-over
threshold before a target cell can be considered as a good
Page 145
cell to add to the source cell's list. target cells that do not
pass the criteria in at least this many bins will not be
considered to be added as neighbors of the source cell
Weak neighbors: Hand-over threshold: Identifies a threshold which a current

Hand-over neighbor cell needs to achieve in order to remain considered
threshold as a neighbor of the source cell. Call segments that achieve
this target are counted towards the score that identifies
whether the target cell should be kept as a neighbor
Max % segments passing criteria: Sets a limit on the number
of segments that need to be counted within the hand-over
threshold below which a target cell is considered as a weak
cell that should be removed from the source cell's list. Target
cells that do not meet the criteria in at least this many bins
will be considered to be weak neighbors that should be
removed from the source cell's list
Scheduling
By default, neighbor plans are run immediately. However, UMTS and IRAT neighbor plans can be
scheduled to run later, or to run regularly at a specific time.
Note: Neighbor Plans are scheduled using the Windows Task Scheduler
To schedule a Neighbor Plan:
1. Click the Schedule tab
2. Click On schedule
3. Click Credentials... and enter the login details for a Windows account with the credentials
necessary to run the Windows Task Scheduler
4. Choose the date on which to start the schedule, and how often the Neighbor Planning task
should run
5. Choose an end date for the schedule. Neighbor Planning will stop running automatically on this
date. By default, the schedule will continue indefinitely
6. Continue to the next tab
Once each scheduled neighbor plan is run, the results will be available in the Results tab of the Data
Explorer.
If your system has the Client - UMTS ANR license installed, you can also automatically actuate the
results of the Neighbor Planning task to the network.
To change or delete a scheduled Neighbor Plan:
Because scheduling is set up using the Windows Task Scheduler, Neighbor Plan tasks cannot be
managed through GEOperformance.
1. Open the Windows Task Scheduler:
a. Click Start > Control Panel
b. Click System and Security > Administrative Tools
c. Click Schedule Tasks
2. In the left-hand pane, navigate to Arieso > GEOperformance. All GEOperformance scheduled
Page 146
tasks will be displayed in the central pane, with names consisting of UMTS neighbour planning
followed by a GUID
3. Edit or delete the task as required, referring to the relevant Microsoft documentation if
necessary
Actuation
If your system has the Client - UMTS ANR license installed, you can actuate the results of UMTS
Intra-frequency and Inter-frequency Neighbor Planning tasks to the network.
To implement the results of Neighbor Planning immediately after the calculation has finished, select
Actuate results automatically.
To check and consider the results before actuation, leave Actuate results automatically clear. You
can see the results of past neighbor plans by dragging them from the Planning tab of the Data
Explorer onto the canvas.
Note: If the state of the network changes between calculation and actuation, you may not be able to
update the results into the network.
To actuate results manually
After calculating, you can actuate the results as follows:
1. Select the neighbor plan to actuate from the Planning tab of the Data Explorer
2. Right-click on the neighbor plan and select Commit... This does not immediately actuate the plan,
but instead opens a window from which you can perform actuation, or rollback a previous
actuation
3. Click Refresh to ensure that GEOperformance is working with the most recent version of the
network data
4. Click Actuate and confirm. The Actuation Log shows the progress of the actuation
You can close the window and return to GEOperformance without disrupting the actuation. To
reopen the window, right-click on the neighbor plan and select Commit... again to display the
current progress.
While actuation is in progress on a set of cells, that set of cells is locked for changes. You can
actuate multiple plans at once, but only if all the plans use completely different sets of cells.
Actuating after network changes
If a cell's actual neighbor list differs from its record in GEOperformance, the neighbor plan will still
attempt to actuate the plan, but will coerce it to fit the current network state. Usually the plan will
still be actuated, but changed cells may be removed from the plan as shown below:
Record in Actual state in GEOperformance Result of actuation
GEOperformanc OSS recommendation
e
A>B No relationship KEEP All changes to Cell A's neighbor list
ignored
A>B No relationship REMOVE Recommendation changed to KEEP. Any
other changes to Cell A's neighbor list
will still be made.
No relationship A > B ADD All changes to Cell A's neighbor list
ignored
Page 147
Result of attempting actuation when a cell's neighbor list differs from the record in GEOperformance
To undo network changes

1. Select the neighbor plan to actuate from the Planning tab of the Data Explorer
2. Right-click on the neighbor plan and select Commit...
3. Click Rollback and confirm. The Actuation Log shows the progress of the rollback
Note: If the state of the network has changed since the calculations were actuated, you will not be
able to roll back the changes.
Start Calculation
Click the Start Calculation or Schedule Calculation button on the Start Calculation page of the
Neighbor Planning wizard to run or schedule the Neighbor Planning calculation.
During calculation a progress-bar is displayed. The user can cancel the calculation at any time whilst
it is running.
When the Neighbor Plan has been calculated, a message is displayed. To view the Neighbor Plan
drag the Table icon to a Presentation Canvas.
If your system has the Client - UMTS ANR license installed, you can also actuate the results of the
Neighbor Planning task to the network. This is possible only for intra-frequency plans on UMTS
technology. For more information, see Actuation.
Viewing Calculated Neighbor Plans

To view a Neighbor Plan immediately after calculation, drag the table icon onto a Presentation
Canvas.
UMTS and IRAT neighbor plans are also saved to the Results tab of the Data Explorer for later
viewing.
A Neighbor Plan control will be created containing the Neighbor Plan information:
Neighbor Plan control showing UMTS Inter-Frequency Plan
The calculated Neighbor Plan and recommendations are now created with each row representing a
neighbor relationship between a Source Cell and a Target Cell. The Neighbor Plan control differs
slightly from a standard Table control in having an additional toolbar that allows relationships to be
added and the Plan to be visualized in a Map control, In addition, the Energy of the before and after
plan is displayed at the bottom of the Control.
The contents of the Neighbor Plan control includes various sets of data including details of the
source and target cell, details of the neighbor relationship between the two cells and various
metrics representing the score or rank of this relationship. Most fields are presented for
Page 148
representation and informative reasons, though one particular field provides a means for the user
to review and edit the relationships in the plan:
The Relation field shows the type of relationship between the Source and Target Cells in the
calculated Neighbor Plan. This is presented as an icon which may have four forms:
One-way Outgoing (green arrow to pointing to right), indicating
the Target Cell is a neighbor of the Source Cell, but the Source
Cell is not a neighbor of the Target Cell
One-way Incoming (red arrow pointing to left), indicating the

Target Cell is not a neighbor of the Source Cell, but the Source
Cell is a neighbor of the Target Cell
Two-way (blue bidirectional arrow) indicating that both the

Source and Target Cells are neighbors of each other
None (gray cross). indicating neither the Source nor Target Cells
are neighbors of each other
Neighbor relationships can be manually edited by clicking on these icons. Repeated clicking will
cycle through the list as required.
Neighbor Plan Contents

The following table identifies the fields of information presented in the Neighbor Plan control for
plans generated by the Neighbor Planning wizard:
Source Label text name given to the Source Cell
Source Cell ID Cell ID value assigned to the Source Cell
Source RNC Radio Network Controller to which the Source Cell is assigned
Source ARFCN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number assigned to the

Source Cell
Source PSC Primary Scrambling Code assigned to the Source Cell
Source Site site on which the Source Cell is located
Target Label text name given to the Target Cell
Target Cell ID Cell ID value assigned to the Target Cell
Target RNC Radio Network Controller to which the Target Cell is assigned
Target ARFCN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number assigned to the

Target Cell
Target PSC Primary Scrambling Code assigned to the Target Cell
Target Site site on which the Target Cell is located
Page 149
Relation showing the presence or absence of one cell on the other's
neighbor list:
- One Way Outgoing. The Target Cell is included on the
Source Cell's neighbor list but the Source Cell is not included
on the Target Cell's list
- One Way Incoming. The Source Cell is included on the
Target Cell's neighbor list but the Target Cell is not included
on the Source Cell's list
- Two Way. Each cell is included on the other's neighbor list
- None. Neither cell is included on the other's neighbor list
Relations are shown as icons of arrows. Icons can be clicked in
order to edit the Neighbor Plan.
Recommendation showing the recommended change to the neighbor plan:

- KEEP. Keep the Target Cell (it already existed in the on-air
plan).
- ADD. Add the Target Cell (it did not exist in the on-air plan).
- REMOVE. Remove the Target Cell (it existed in the on-air
plan).
Recommendations in UPPER CASE refer to the outgoing
relationship. Recommendations in lower case and surrounded
in parentheses refer to the incoming relationship
Reason explaining the recommendation. Reason types are:

- Above Max Entries. The Neighbor List is being pruned to
the maximum number set in the Neighbor Planning wizard,
this relationship is a lower priority than the limit. Seen with
a Remove recommendation.
- High Calculated Score. This relationship has a high
calculated Energy. Seen with an Add recommendation.
- Missing Neighbor Below CDF Threshold. The Neighbor List
is being pruned to the CDF threshold in the Neighbor
Planning wizard, this relationship is a lower priority than the
limit. Seen with a Remove recommendation.
- Not Seen (Keep on Air). Source Cell not observed, neighbor
list retained. Seen with a Keep Recommendation.
- Unused Neighbor. Target Cell not observed in conjunction
with Source Cell.
Count shows the number of times the Source Cell and Target Cell were
seen above the Ec/Io threshold. In the case of Intra-frequency
Neighbor Planning this refers to the number of Call Segments,
in the case of Inter-frequency Neighbor Planning this refers to
the number of Map bins
Signal Sum shows the Energy, the linear sum of the observed Ec/Io values,
Page 150
for the Target Cell integrated over the study period
Signal Cumulative shows the cumulative distribution of the Energy for all
Score preceding Target Cells (i.e. of higher priority for the same
Source Cell)
Master Plan Pos shows the priority of the Target cell in the Source Cells
Neighbor List as taken from the OSS
Calculated Rank shows the suggested priority of the Target Cell in the Source
Cells Neighbor List based on the Signal Cumulative Score
Average Ec/Io shows the observed average Ec/Io of the Target Cell
Distance (km) shows the distance (in km) between the Source Cell and Target
Cell
Neighbors shows the number of free neighbors remaining in the Source

Remaining Cell's Neighbor List, assuming the Max Neighbor List Size set in
the Neighbor Planning Wizard
Observation shows any additional observations that the algorithm made for
this neighbor relationship, in particular scrambling code
conflicts. It is important to look for any Scrambling Code
Conflict that indicates when two Target Cell have the same SC
as this condition can cause an increased number of dropped
calls
Changed indicates if the relationship has been manually edited
The Relation, Recommendation and Reason fields when considered together present both a list of
the proposed neighbor relationships and a definition of the changes that need to be made to the
current neighbor plan in order to generate this proposed neighbor plan.
Explanation of Relations and Reasons

Within the set of fields present in a Neighbor Plan, the Relation, Recommendation and Reason fields
provide they key definition of the plan's structure. The following table sets out explanations for the
entries in these columns.
# Relation Recommendation Reason Explanation
GEOperformance has measurements for

both Source and Target Cells but no
Unused
1 REMOVE measurements in this relation so this
None Neighbor
means the relation is None and
recommendation is set to Remove.
GEOperformance has measurements for

both Source and Target Cells but no
measurements in this relation so this
Unused
2 (remove) REMOVE means the relation is None and
None Neighbor
recommendation is set to Remove. A
Remove recommendation has also been set
on the Target Cell's Neighbor List.
Page 151
The Target Cell has measurements in

Missing
GEOperformance but it is below the CDF
3 REMOVE Neighbor Below
None Threshold set so this means the
CDF Threshold

Missing
Threshold set so this means the
4 (remove) REMOVE Neighbor Below
None recommendation is set to Remove. A
CDF Threshold
Remove recommendation has also been set
on the Target Cell's Neighbor List.

GEOperformance however it is ranked
Above Max
5 REMOVE above the maximum number of list entries
None Entries
so this means the recommendation is set
to Remove.

above the maximum number of list entries
Above Max
6 (remove)REMOVE so this means the recommendation is set
None Entries
to Remove. A Remove recommendation has
also been set on the Target Cell's Neighbor
List.

Missing
threshold set so this means the
7 One Way (keep) REMOVE Neighbor Below
Incoming CDF Threshold
However a Keep recommendation has been
set on the Target Cell's Neighbor List.

Missing
threshold set so this means the
8 One Way (add) REMOVE Neighbor Below
Incoming CDF Threshold
However an Add recommendation has
been set on the Target Cell's Neighbor List.

Above Max above the maximum number of list entries
9 One Way (keep) REMOVE
Entries so is discarded. However a Keep
Incoming recommendation has been set on the
Target Cell's Neighbor List

above the maximum number of list entries
Above Max
10 One Way (add) REMOVE so this means the recommendation is set
Entries
Incoming to Remove. However an Add
recommendation has been set on the
Target Cell's Neighbor List.
There are no measurements in

Not Seen (Keep GEOperformance for the Target Cell or
11 One Way KEEP
OnAir) Source Cell. To minimize risk the
Outgoing recommendation is set to Keep.
Page 152

High Calculated GEOperformance and its recommendation
12 One Way ADD
Score is set to Add as it meets / is within the set
Outgoing criteria of CDF and Max List entries.
This is a neighbor which should be kept

13 One Way KEEP following calculation.
Outgoing

following calculation. However a Remove
14 One Way (remove) KEEP
Outgoing Target Cell's Neighbor List

GEOperformance and its recommendation
High Calculated is set to Add as it meets / is within the set
15 One Way (remove) ADD
Score criteria of CDF and Max List entries.
Outgoing However a Remove recommendation has
been set on the Target Cell's Neighbor List
There are no measurements in

GEOperformance for the Target Cell or
Not Seen (Keep Source Cell. To minimize risk the
16 (keep) KEEP
Two Way OnAir) recommendation is set to Keep. A Keep
recommendation has also been set on the

following calculation. A Keep
17 (keep) KEEP
Two Way recommendation has also been set on the

following calculation. An Add
18 (add) KEEP
Two Way recommendation has also been set on the

19 (add) ADD
Two Way Score criteria of CDF and Max List entries. An Add
recommendation has also been set on the

20 (keep) ADD
Two Way Score criteria of CDF and Max List entries. A Keep
Adding and Editing Relationships

When viewing a Neighbor Plan created by the Neighbor Planning wizard, the type of the relationship
between a selected pair of Source and Target Cells can be changed by clicking on the button in the
Relation column. This toggles through the 4 possible relationships: One-way Outgoing, One-way
Incoming, Two-way and None. When the Relation is changed from the calculated relation,the entry
in the Changed column is set to True, the Recommendation is set to Manual the row is colored
Page 153
yellow:
Neighbor Plan dialog with manual changes
Note: Toggling back to the original relation reverts the row color to white and the Changed entry is
set back to False.
A completely new relationship can be added by selecting the Add a New Neighbor Relationship
button from the Neighbor Plan toolbar. This opens the Add Neighbor dialog, where the user can add
a new relationship by entering the Source Cell and Target Cell:
Add Neighbor dialog
Spider Representations of Neighbors

Having produced a Neighbor Plan, a cell’s Neighbor Relationships can be viewed in a map as spider
legs via the Neighbor Spider control. In the Neighbor Plan control select a row containing the source
cell of interest. Press the Show Spider button the Neighbor Plan toolbar, making sure there is a Map
control open on the same Presentation Canvas:
Show Spider button
Page 154
The relationships for the selected cell are shown in the Neighbor Spider dialog:
Neighbor Spider control
The user can choose between displaying the Calculated or Master plan, and the Target Cells (i.e. the
outbound neighbor List) or the Source Cells (i.e. the inbound Neighbor List). The relationships are
also shown on the map, retaining the color from the dialog:
Spider Neighbor layer in Map control

The Problem Identification wizard can be found under the Optimization ribbon. It guides the user
through the process of identifying, prioritizing and analyzing geographic problem areas within the
network. The wizard follows a five stage process:
Configure Filter Identify the time and area to analyse and set other basic filter
constraints on the analysis
Scheduling Choose whether to run problem identification once only, or

automatically at regular intervals
(Not available for
GSM)
Problem Select to define the types of problems to investigate and set

Selection key thresholds to govern the definitions of each problem type
Page 155
Prioritizing Search of the defined area to identify the highest priority cases
Problem Areas of each problem type selected
Drilling down into Select individual polygons perform a Problem Drill-Down

Problems
For UMTS technology, the results produced by the Problem Identification Wizard are saved so that
they can be used by other GEOperformance features. For example, you could schedule a problem
search and then run Neighbor Planning automatically on the results, even actuating the suggested
neighbor list changes into the network.
Note: The Problem Identification Wizard requires the Identify Problems license.
Note: Problem types and drill down templates can be customized. Speak to your Arieso
representative for further details.
Configure Filter
The first stage of the Problem Identification wizard is configuring a Filter for the analysis.
Alternatively, you can drag a filter from an existing analysis on to the filter icon.
You can filter the data by any filter available for the technology. For more information, see the
Common, UMTS, GSM or LTE filters.
Example Problem Identification Wizard Configure Filter page
Click Next to continue.

Note: Arieso usually recommends running problem searches over a time period of less than two
weeks. Long time periods can cause long delays in generating the analyses that show drill down
information.
Scheduling
By default, Problem Identification runs immediately. However, UMTS or LTE problem searches can
be scheduled to run later, or to run regularly at a specific time.
Note: Problem Identification tasks are scheduled using the Windows Task Scheduler
To schedule a Problem Identification task:
1. Click the Schedule tab
2. Click On schedule
Page 156
3. Click Credentials... and enter the login details for a Windows account with the credentials
necessary to run the Windows Task Scheduler
4. Choose the date on which to start the schedule, and how often the Problem Identification task
should run
5. Choose an end date for the schedule. The Problem Identification task will stop running
automatically on this date. By default, the schedule will continue indefinitely
6. Continue to the next tab
Once each scheduled Problem Identification task is run, the results will be available in the Results
tab of the Data Explorer.
To change or delete a scheduled Problem Identification task:
Because scheduling is set up using the Windows Task Scheduler, Problem Identification tasks cannot
be managed through GEOperformance.
1. Open the Windows Task Scheduler:
a. Click Start > Control Panel
b. Click System and Security > Administrative Tools
c. Click Schedule Tasks
2. In the left-hand pane, navigate to Arieso > GEOperformance. All GEOperformance scheduled
tasks will be displayed in the central pane, with names consisting of Problem Identification
followed by a GUID
3. Edit or delete the task as required, referring to the relevant Microsoft documentation if
necessary
Problem Selection
The second stage of the Problem Identification wizard is to identify the types of problems to search
for. Check the Problem Type analyses to run. The MOU (minutes of use) analysis is always run so
that problem areas can be prioritized by the amount of network traffic in the affected area.
Use the Threshold parameter to set the values that the wizard uses to generate its problem area
polygons. In general, the higher you set the problem threshold the fewer or smaller problem areas
the wizard will find.
UMTS Problem Identification wizard Problem Selection page
You can also specify the maximum number of polygons to be presented. The Problem Identification
wizard will generate all possible polygons based on your thresholds, but only show the number
specified. These will be the areas that affect the most traffic (MOU).
Page 157
Click Run to run the task immediately.
If the task has been scheduled, a Schedule button will also be available. Click this option to run the
task as scheduled. An additional stage shows when the task will run. Check that this is correct, and
then click Schedule the calculations to confirm.
Prioritizing Problem Areas

The wizard searches through the selected call segments to identify the highest priority cases of each
problem type. Once the search has completed, click the + symbol next to a problem type to see the
list of polygons calculated for that problem type.
Problem Identification wizard Problem Area Identification page
The table of polygons can be sorted or filtered by any column, exactly as if it were a table analysis.
Individual polygons can be viewed on a map canvas, or you can drill down into the details of
network performance within that polygon.
To view polygons in a map
1. Select one or more polygons
2. Click Show Selected Problems in Map
Alternatively, you can double-click on a specific polygon to automatically display it in the Map
Control of the active canvas.
Page 158
Problem area polygons are added as new layers at the top of the Map Control layer pane. All the
polygons created for a specific problem type are contained within a folder named after the problem
type:
Problem Area Polygons displayed in a Map control
Drilling down into Problems

The final stage of the Problem Identification wizard is to select individual polygons perform a
Problem Drill-Down. Highlight a single polygon on the Problem Area Identification page and click
Next to access the Problem Drill-Down Preparation page:
Problem Identification Wizard Problem Drill-Down Preparation page
From here you can view a set of analyses that investigate conditions in the polygon, or you can run
a Neighbor Planning exercise based on a specified scenario. This window does not close
automatically, so you could view analyses and then decide whether to run Neighbor Planning.
Viewing analyses for the selected polygon
Click Create Canvas to create a new Presentation Canvas based upon a template specified for the
specific problem type. This will automatically run a set of analyses on the specified area.
Page 159
Depending on the analyses specified by the template, you may need to set filters.
An example Problem Identification template
Note: These templates can be customized.

Running Neighbor Planning for the selected polygon
If your installation of GEOperformance is licensed for Neighbor Planning, then depending on the
technology you may also be able to calculate improved neighbor relationships for the cells within
the selected polygon. To do this:
1. Click on the Scenario drop-down
2. Select a scenario to use. A scenario contains the settings that are necessary to run Neighbor
Planning. If there are no scenarios available from the drop-down, you may need to create a
scenario in Neighbor Planning before you can run Neighbor Planning from a problem search
3. Click Run Scenario
GEOperformance will run Neighbor Planning on the selected polygon and return a set of neighbor
recommendations.
Using saved problem searches

GEOperformance saves the results of all the problem searches you perform. These can be found in
the Results tab of the Data Explorer. From here you can:
Show all the problem polygons in a map control
Drill down into a specific problem polygon
Open the Problems folder to see all the problem searches that have been run, arranged by date.
Hover your mouse over a problem search to see the filters that were used for it.
Adding problem polygons to a map
To add all the polygons produced by the problem wizard to a map:
1. In the Data Explorer, open the Problems folder
Page 160
2. Click on a file and drag it onto a map control. Do not try to click and drag individual polygons
Polygons dragged from the Data Explorer onto a map control
All of the polygons produced by the problem search will be shown on the map. You can show and
hide polygons by selecting and deselecting them as normal.
Drilling down into a saved polygon
To view a set of analyses that investigate conditions in a saved polygon:
1. In the Data Explorer, open the Problems folder
2. Navigate to the polygon to investigate. Note that, unlike in the Problem Identification Wizard,
you cannot see details such as MOU or maximum values for individual polygons before opening
them
3. Right-click on the desired polygon and click Open in New Canvas
A new canvas will open, running a number of analyses on the selected polygon. This drill-down
canvas is the same as that run from within the Problem Identification Wizard.
Triggering Neighbor Planning

When using UMTS technology, if you also have access to the Neighbor Planning feature, you can use
the UMTS Problem Identification Wizard to identify problem polygons and then run UMTS Neighbor
Planning on those polygons.
This can be done either manually, or automatically after a scheduled problem search.
Note: You cannot use saved Problem Identification results to trigger Neighbor Planning
Neighbor Planning uses saved scenarios to supply the settings to use for plans triggered from
another feature. In order to run Neighbor Planning based on a problem search, you must have saved
at least one scenario.
Manually triggering Neighbor Planning
To run Neighbor Planning manually, run the Problem Identification Wizard as usual:
1. Click Identify Problems > UMTS Problem Identification
2. On the Configure Filter screen: Set the required filters
3. On the Scheduling screen: Select Immediately to run the problem search as soon as it has been
Page 161
set up
4. On the Problem Selection screen: Select the problems to search for and click Run
5. On the Problem Area Identification screen: Select a polygon to run Neighbor Planning for and
click Next
6. Select a Neighbor Planning scenario to run on the selected polygon and click Run Scenario
7. Close the Problem Identification Wizard
8. In the Data Explorer, click on the Results tab
9. In the Neighbor Plans folder, navigate to the neighbor plan created (shown with a table icon)
10.Drag the neighbor plan to a canvas to view the recommended changes. Alternatively, right-click
and select Commit to begin the process of actuating it to the network
Automatically triggering Neighbor Planning
Neighbor Planning can be triggered automatically at the end of each run of a scheduled problem
search. If actuation is included in the scenario used, this enables GEOperformance to automatically
search for problems and take action to solve them. In order to achieve this, Neighbor Planning must
be set up when scheduling the problem search.
1. Click Identify Problems > UMTS Problem Identification
2. On the Configure Filter screen: Set the required filters
3. On the Scheduling screen: Select On schedule and set the schedule and the user credentials to use
to set up the task
4. On the Problem Selection screen: For each problem, select a threshold for identifying problem
polygons and a Neighbor Planning scenario to run on the polygons produced
5. Click Schedule
6. On the Scheduling screen: Check the schedule settings and click Schedule the calculations
Every time the scheduled problem search identifies a problem polygon, Neighbor Planning will run
on that polygon. If actuation is included in the scenario used, the results will automatically be
updated into the network.
The polygons and neighbor plans resulting from each scheduled problem search can be viewed from
the Results tab of the Data Explorer.
4.3.4 GSM Frequency Reuse

The GSM Frequency Reuse capabilities of GEOperformance allow the identification of co-channel
and adjacent channel reuse issues independently in the TCH and BCCH channels.
These capabilities are accessed from a set of Frequency Reuse analyses in the Optimization folder.
GSM Frequency Reuse Maps

The GSM Frequency Reuse analyses are available as maps or tables.
To run the analyses drag the desired Frequency Reuse analysis to a map control, or directly onto the
Presentation Canvas.
Use the Minimum Call Segments Threshold parameter on each analysis to set how many call
segments per cell need to conflict for the bin overlap to be considered in the analysis.
Page 162
GSM Frequency Re-Use Parameter Setting
The figure below illustrates the results of the map analyses:
GSM Frequency Reuse
You can view more information using the Raster Analysis at Point map tool. This adds a Frequency
Re-Use Spider layer and shows statistics on the amount of overlap. Legs with the same color
indicate conflicting cells.
GSM Frequency Reuse Map - Co-Channel BCCH Overlap
Page 163
4.3.5 Scrambling Code Tuning
The Scrambling Code Tuning capabilities of GEOperformance allow the identification of Scrambling
Code Conflicts and identification of alternative Scrambling Codes for the Cells in question.
Fundamentally the Scrambling Code analyses function by exploration of the network topology,
generating a mesh of inter-connectivity based upon the Active Neighbor List. The inter-connectivity
is identified in two ways:
The Tier of the relationship identifies the closest relationship considering connectivity by Neighbors:
A first order neighbor relationship (Tier = 1) has a direct neighbor relationship between the two
Cells under consideration.
A second order neighbor relationship (Tier = 2) is a neighbor of a neighbor, i.e. the two Cells under
consideration appear within the same Neighbor List.
A third order neighbor relationship (Tier = 3) is a neighbor of a neighbor of a neighbor.
A fourth order neighbor relationship (Tier = 4) is a neighbor of a neighbor of a neighbor of a
neighbor.
The relationship between two Cells is defined by the shortest route between them: i.e. if two cells
are both 2nd order and 4th order neighbors, they are considered to be 2nd order (Tier = 2)
Note: Only relationships within the same Carrier are considered, i.e. Intra-frequency neighbors.
Inter-frequency neighbors are ignored.
The Score of a Scrambling Code allocation is derived from the Tiers of the neighbor relationships
with the same scrambling code from the Cell under consideration. The composite Score is the sum
of the scores for all co-code allocations on the same Carrier: the higher the Score the worse the
allocation. Scores for neighbor relationships are defined on a logarithmic scale:
1st order co-code allocation, Score = 1000
2nd order co-code allocation, Score = 100
3rd order co-code allocation, Score = 10
4th order co-code allocation, Score = 1
Thus an allocation with a single 2nd order neighbor relationship with a co-code allocation and two
4th order neighbor relationships with a co-code allocation has a Score of 102.
There are five Scrambling Code analyses. Typically it is expected that Scrambling Code Conflicts will
be run first over a wide area, before focussing on potential conflicts identified with Scrambling Code
Choices, and Scrambling Code Suggestions analyses. Neighbor and Code Relationships is provided for
information, exposing the interconnections between cells in the network.
Note: Scrambling Code Tuning is not available for GSM.
Identifying Scrambling Code Conflicts

The Scrambling Code Conflicts analysis identifies potential conflicts between scrambling code
allocations. Drag the analysis from the Data Explorer to a Presentation Canvas to run the analysis.
Page 164
Scrambling Code Conflicts analysis
Note: Either a Cell or RNC filter are required. The analysis is intended for use on filters of up to
several hundred cells.
The Scrambling Codes Conflict analysis returns:
Source Cell information including Scrambling Code, Carrier, Latitude & Longitude.
Cumulative Conflict Score and worst case Conflict Score
Neighboring Cell information for worst case conflict including Scrambling Code, Carrier, Latitude
& Longitude, and Neighbor Tier
Distance between the Source Cell and Neighboring Cell
Relative Bearing between the Source Cell and Neighbor Cell.
o A Relative Bearing of 0 degrees indicates the two cells are pointing at one another,
o A Relative Bearing of 360 degrees or -360 degrees indicates they are pointing away from one
another.
Scrambling Code Conflicts analysis
Identifying Alternative Scrambling Codes

There are three Analyses aimed at identifying alternative scrambling codes for a location:
Scrambling Code Suggestions (Basic) provides a simple suggestion for an alternative Scrambling
Code for the Cells in the Filter. If more than a single Cell is in the filter no conflicts between the
Page 165
suggestions are considered.
Scrambling Code Suggestions (Advanced) provides a simple suggestion for an alternative
Scrambling Code for the cells in the Filter. However if more than a single Cell is in the Filter the
analysis will seek to ensure that no Conflict occurs between the suggestions for different Cells.
Scrambling Code Choices provides a comprehensive list of Scrambling Code options for the Cells in
the Filter.
Scrambling Code Choices Ranked by Score analysis
The Scrambling Codes Conflict analysis returns:

Source Cell information including Scrambling Code, Carrier, Latitude & Longitude.
Scrambling Code Choice and Conflict Score
Nearest Co-code Allocation Cell information including Scrambling Code, Carrier, Latitude &
Longitude, and Neighbor Tier
Distance between the Source Cell and Nearest Co-code Allocation Cell
Relative Bearing between the Source Cell and Nearest Co-code Allocation Cell.
All three Analyses used to identify alternative Scrambling Codes can be filtered by a Scrambling Code
list, allowing Scrambling Codes which have been reserved to be excluded from the analysis.
4.3.6 Antenna Tuning

The Antenna Tuning capabilities of GEOperformance allow the investigation of alternative Cell
configurations, including turning a cell off, reducing the pilot power, changing the azimuth and
changing the tilt.
Antenna Tuning functions through a series of Multi analyses available from the Data Explorer. Each
Multi Analysis allows the user to specify a parameter change for a single cell and generates 12 Map
layers showing the performance of the Original and Tuned configurations. Layers that are generated
include:
Ec/Io Footprint showing the Ec/Io footprint for the modified Cell
RSCP Footprint showing the RSCP footprint for the modified Cell
Best Server showing the Best Server (highest Ec/Io) for all Cells
Strongest Server showing the Strongest Server (highest RSCP) for all Cells
Ec/Io showing the Best Server Ec/Io for all Cells
Page 166
RSCP showing the Best Server RSCP for all Cells
The assumptions made in the prediction of the tuned performance are explained in the following
sections.
The analyses is performed by selecting a right clicking on a cell:
Antenna Tuning Options
Four different analyses are available, these include Change of Azimuth, Change of Power, Change Tilt
or Turn Cell Off.
Note: The Antenna tuning functionality only supports a single cell.
Note: It is important to consider the assumptions made in the following sections. Antenna tuning is
intended to provide guidance and perspective to an experienced engineer rather than provide an
authoritative prediction of future network performance should a change be made.
Note: Antenna Tuning is not currently available for GSM.
Tuned Layer Calculation Assumptions

The Antenna Tuning capability in GEOperformance seeks to estimate the performance of power
and antenna changes on both RSCP and Ec/Io. The following assumptions are made:
Only delta predictions are considered. Only where GEOperformance has geo-located
measurements are predictions of future performance made. This means that significant uptilts or
increases in pilot power may potentially result in network degradations to areas of the network in
which the cell is not currently measured.
Change in RSCP is considered to be the change in antenna mask loss (see following section on
assumptions) or change in pilot power for the cell under consideration.
Change in Ec/Io considers the impact on both Ec (i.e. RSCP) and Io. In the case of Io the change is
considered to be in proportion to the change in RSCP of the modified Cell, assuming an increase in
total power transmitted from the cell to be five times the increase in CPICH RSCP (in linear terms,
the equivalent of assuming 10% transmitted CPICH, 50% total downlink load).
No consideration of traffic offload between cells is made.
Antenna Model Assumptions

The Antenna Tuning capability in GEOperformance assumes a theoretical antenna mask based upon
an ellipse generated from the 3dB beamwidths of a cell and an assumed front to back ratio. The
assumption made in estimating the antenna mask loss include:
Flat earth, no consideration is made of earth curvature, DTM or building vector layers.
Page 167
Mobile located at ground level.
Assumed Front to Back Ratio of antennas is 25dB.
Changes in tilt are modeled as mechanical tilt.
The horizontal 3dB beamwidth of the antenna is taken from the network configuration, the
vertical 3dB beamwidth is entered as a parameter value, with a default of 10 degrees.
The theoretical antenna mask has the following characteristics:
Negligible change in back lobe of cell, with either tilt or azimuth change.
No consideration of antenna nulls in the vertical mask.
Note: It is not recommended that tilt changes are investigated in hilly terrain.
4.3.7 Export to ariesoACP

The GEO to ACP export functionality enables you to create an ariesoACP project based upon
geolocated RF and traffic data from GEOperformance.
Export to ariesoACP is available for GSM, UMTS and LTE. The procedure for exporting is similar for
all technologies.
In order to use this feature, ariesoACP must be installed and licensed.
GEO-ACP Project Directory Structure

When a GEO-ACP project is created, one or more actual ariesoACP projects are created. A separate
ariesoACP project (folder, .xma file and project files) is created for each carrier that is exported, up
to a maximum of 6 ariesoACP projects.
Below is an example directory/file structure from an export for a given project name of “LA1” that
contains 3 carriers – 112, 137 and 162:
Example ariesoACP project structure
The ariesoACP projects are given the name of the root project, followed by the carrier in
parentheses to distinguish between them. There is no reference to the carrier in the ariesoACP
project apart from the name.
Antennas, Heights and Regions

This topic describes how to set the locations of the heights, regions and antenna files that Export to
ariesoACP requires.
Heights and Regions Files
Page 168
The heights file and regions file should be in ESRI grid format. The height file provides a topographic
model of the bare earth/underlying terrain of the Earth’s surface, whereas the regions file specifies
land use.
To set up heights and regions:
1. Copy your height and region files into separate directories on the application server.
2. Open the GEOperformance Administrator Console and log in.
3. Click the GEO Areas tab and select the relevant GEO Area.
4. In the Heights Directory and Regions Directory options, enter the folder locations in which the
relevant grid files are saved.
5. Click Update GEO Area to save your changes.
Antenna Files
The antenna file should be in the MSI format used by ariesoACP.
To set up the antenna file:
1. Copy your antenna file into a directory on the application server. For maintainability, this should
normally be a similar location to the height and region files.
2. Open a command (DOS) window as an administrator.
3. Navigate to the GEOperformance\bin directory. For example, cd "C:\Program Files\Arieso
\GEOperformance\bin"
4. Use the SetGeoConfig.exe command to set the directory in which the antenna file is stored. For
example, setgeoconfig.exe AntennaDataDirectory="C:\Antennas"
Your antenna file is now ready to use.
Launching the GEO-ACP Export Functionality

In the Optimization ribbon, click Export to ariesoACP in to show the Export to ariesoACP wizard.
The Export to ACP wizard, for a new project
The Export to ariesoACP dialog is split into several pages accessed by clicking on the title tabs on the
left hand side. Status icons on the title tabs are used to indicate the status of the settings on that
page:
All ok Can proceed
Page 169
Needs attention Cannot proceed without fixing
Ok, but with warnings Can proceed but consider the warnings
Contains an error Cannot proceed without fixing
The Project Settings page

When the Project Settings page is first shown, choose whether to create a new GEO-ACP project or
updating an existing GEO-ACP project.
Once this decision has been made, further tabs and options are displayed.
Creating a new GEO-ACP project
Select Create a new GEO-ACP project
Choose the parent folder path.
Choose a project name. This name will be used as the prefix for the separate ariesoACP projects
created.
Choose an ariesoACP project template that created ariesoACP projects will be based on:
o One of the default templates supplied with the GEOperformance installation (found in C:
\ProgramData\areisoGEO\ariesoACP\Templates)
o Or your own ariesoACP project template.
o New project(s) will be created from the template and will be populated from the selected
GEOperformance data with the various data items listed (projection, network, calculation zone,
focus zone, height layer, region layer, antenna folder and services).
Choose the Time Period and Day Hour Settings that will be used for any analyses run (traffic, data
integrity, pathloss).
Updating an existing GEO-ACP project
1. Enter or browse to the xma file of one of the ACP projects of a previously created GEO-ACP
project.
2. Choose which components of the projects to update.
3. Choose the Time Period and Day Hour Settings. The Time Period settings apply to all analyses
(traffic, data integrity, pathloss), but the Day Hour Settings only apply to traffic.
Note: When you initially launch the dialog the default time period is set to be the last 14 days, and
the default day/hour settings is set to be from 9am to 5pm inclusive, Monday to Friday.
Note: Some settings differ depending on whether you are creating a new project or updating an
existing one.
The Calculation Zone page

A Calculation Zone must be set when a new GEO-ACP project is created. This is the area that
ariesoACP takes into account in its calculations, and must be larger or the same size as the Focus
Zone to be optimized. To set up a calculation zone, open a map control in GEOperformance and
either zoom in to the area of interest or draw a polygon around it.
The Calculation Zone options are:
Keep the existing zone in the project being updated. This option is only available if editing an
existing project. If creating a new project, a specific Calculation Zone must be set.
Page 170
Use a Variable (Document Bounds, Loaded Data Bounds or Network Bounds)
Use a Polygon or Map Bounds
o Drag a Polygon from a Map control or Data Explorer.
o Drag the Map Bounds icon from a Map control to use the map’s current bounding box.
When the user has defined a Calculation Zone, the Width, Height, Bounding Box Area and Grid
Resolution are updated to reflect the zone’s information.
Creating a new Export - Calculation Zone
The Focus Zone page

The Focus Zone is the specific area for ariesoACP to optimize, using data from the Calculation Zone.
It must always be smaller than or equal to the Calculation Zone.
The Focus Zone options are:
Keep the existing zone in the project being updated. This option is only available if editing an
existing project. If creating a new project, a specific focus zone must be set.
The same as the Calculation Zone. This is the default if no Focus Zone is set.
Use a Variable (Bounding Box or Geographic Area)
Use a Polygon or Map Bounds
Note: The Focus Zone must be totally inside the calculation zone (or be exactly the same).
When a Focus Zone is selected, the Width, Height, Bounding Box Area and Grid Resolution are
updated to reflect the zone’s information.
The ARFCN page

Use the ARFCN page to select up to 6 carriers to consider in ariesoACP optimization.
Note: You cannot change the ARFCNs in an existing project.
For each carrier, the export tool shows the number of Cells with that carrier and the number of Sites
containing those Cells. If any of the cells are invalid, they are listed in the Info column.
Select which Carriers to export. GEOperformance will create a new ariesoACP project for each.
If you want ariesoACP to automatically generate Cell Links, check the Link multiple projects together
box. This links the ariesoACP projects in a multi-layer configuration. If this box is not checked the
ariesoACP projects will be standalone projects, though they may still share height, regions and
Page 171
traffic.
Note: This linking does not include creating Antenna Type Links or Service Links. These must be set
manually within ariesoACP.
Creating a new Export - ARFCN
The Services page

ariesoACP may make use of Services, together with associated Traffic Density maps. Traffic Density
maps are defined as Analyses within GEOperformance and are hence tailored towards specific
service definitions. For this reason the Export to ariesoACP function will use Service Definitions
created specifically for export and will ignore any Services that may already have been defined in
the ariesoACP Template. The Services Definitions are retrieved from a separate configuration file.
Note: The system administrator should have configured GEOperformance to offer a selection of
Services relevant for your market area
The available Services are listed on the Services page. From this page the user can select which
Services to export.
Note: If only one carrier is chosen for export, then the options Create a traffic map for each carrier
and Create one shared traffic map are not available.
The options for each service are:
o Export Service.
o Export Traffic. This option exports a traffic density map.
o Traffic Scale. This option enables you to increase or decrease the amount of traffic used in the
optimization calculation. This is used as the Quantity scale value in the Traffic and Simulations
page in ariesoACP.
o Use for weighing KPIs. This box should normally be checked. The ariesoACP algorithms are
based on trying to achieve certain KPIs. By default, ariesoACP considers all bins equal when
calculating KPIs, which provides percentage of area scores. Checking this box weights each bin
by the amount of traffic within it, providing percentage of traffic scores.
In new projects, a choice of how to create the Traffic Density maps can then be made. In existing
projects, this cannot be changed.
o Create a traffic map for each ARFCN creates one traffic map per service per carrier.
o Create a traffic map per service, shared across all carriers creates one traffic map per service
which is a combination of traffic across all the selected carriers.
Page 172
o Create a traffic map for each frequency band creates one traffic map per service per frequency
band which is a combination of traffic across all the selected carriers for that service in the
same frequency band
Note: Creating separate Traffic Density maps for each carrier does not simulate the effect of traffic
balancing between network layers.
Creating a new Export - Services
Exporting
Check that the Components page shows the correct components to export. For a new project,
normally all these are selected and cannot be changed. Then click Next to move onto the Export
page.
Click the Start Export on the Export page to start the export. During the export, messages showing
the export progress and status will appear in the message log.
Before it begins exporting, GEOperformance will validate the data used. Only once these data
integrity checks have passed will it begin creating an ariesoACP project.
The Export finished message in the message log indicates that the export has completed
successfully.
You can use the Exported projects and Generated pathloss plots tabs to see exactly what
GEOperformance has exported.
Pathloss Generated Plots

Once the export has completed, the Generated pathloss plots tab shows the pathloss plots
generated by the process. To view these plots, drag the grids in the list to a Map control.
The RSCP (Composite) layer is a measured RSCP plot filled in with predicted data, comparable to an
ariesoACP RSCP layer.
The Network
There is not a separate page for the network export: the network is always exported when creating
a GEO-ACP project and optionally updated when updating a project.
The Sites and Cells within the Calculation Zone are saved to the exported ariesoACP projects; the
Cells of the appropriate Carriers saved to the appropriate ariesoACP project for that Carrier.
The Sites and Cells are saved by copying the Site and Cell .dbf files from the template. Then using
the provided .dbf column headers, adding a row for each Site and Cell.
Page 173
For the Cells, the content of each row is defined by the Python script:
C:\ProgramData\GEOperformance\AriesoACP\SectorExport.py
Note: If there is no customized script in that location, a standard script is copied from C:\ProgramData
\GEOperformance\Sample.AriesoACP\SectorExport.py.
This sets specific cell fields with the appropriate values (if stored in GEO) or defaults. If a column
value doesn’t exist in the script, nothing is written for that column entry in the dbf.
Pathloss
Pathloss is always calculated when creating a GEO-ACP project and optionally updated when
updating a project. There is not a separate page for the pathloss export.
The configuration file used for the pathloss process is read from:
C:\ProgramData\GEOperformance\AriesoACP\PcmdPathlossTemplateConfig.xml
If this doesn’t exist, the sample one will be copied first from:
C:\ProgramData\GEOperformance\Sample.AriesoACP\PcmdPathlossTemplateConfig.xml
It is not possible to edit any of these pathloss parameters in the GUI.
If you edit this configuration file, make sure you edit the:
C:\ProgramData\GEOperformance\AriesoACP\PcmdPathlossTemplateConfig.xml
As that is not removed during the uninstall or upgrade of GEOperformance.
Generated pathloss grids are stored in the Coverage folder for each ACP project, which is normally
the “Internal\Coverage” folder within each separate ACP project. If pathloss is configured to
calculate per frequency band, then they will be stored in "Internal\Coverage (band)", where band is
the frequency band number. Plots that are generated during the pathloss export process are stored
in the “PathlossPlots” folder in each ACP project’s folder. These are in .ASC (ASCII grid) format.
A log file of the pathloss process is stored in each ACP project’s folder in the “Pathloss Export.log”
file. This is appended to with each project update.
Backups When Updating Projects

When updating ariesoACP projects, backups of certain data are made, in case the user wishes to
retrieve older versions. A version number is stored in the GEO metadata file
(“GeoAcpMetaData.xml”) for each export/update done for the GEO-ACP projects.
Page 174
For example, if version 1 of a project has been created (by doing a new export) and then an update
is done (creating version 2), the following backups of the version 1 files are done (if appropriate):
Object Current Path Backup Path
Project XMA file “LA1 (112).xma” “LA1 (112).v1.xma”
Network “Data” folder “data.v1” folder

Coverage folder “Internal\Coverage” “Internal\Coverage.v1”
folder folder
Pathloss Plots “PathlossPlots” folder “PathlossPlots.v1” folder

Folder
This way the user can always go back to an older version of the project (by manually copying and
renaming files and folders).
Note: If the user chooses to update the network, a backup of the network folder and files is done.
During the update a brand new network is created. Therefore any changes to the network done and
saved in ariesoACP will be lost.
Page 175
4.3.8 Advanced Diagnostics Module
The Advanced Diagnostics Module (AD Module) enables skilled engineers to perform investigations
at a deeper level on specific call data or messages.
For example, it can be used to investigate device performance by examining call setup times, or to
locate geographical areas where pilot pollution might be reducing throughput by analyzing relative
numbers of E1D (Change of Best Cell) events.
The AD Module follows a task-based, problem-solving approach that guides you to the appropriate
analyses to use for a specific purpose. For example, to examine possible device issues you would
select the Devices investigation, which would give you access to a number of different analyses,
such as RRC Setup Times or Traffic Volume Measurement Events, all set up and optimized to provide
device-specific information.
The AD Module requires the AdvancedDiagnostics license.
The AD Module User Interface

The AD Module is opened from the Optimization ribbon. By default it is shown as a pane at the
right-hand side of the screen, though like other panes it can be undocked and moved.
The AD Module Topics page
The initial page shown is the Topics page. This is a high-level overview of the areas that can be
investigated.
Topic: Click on a topic to see a page of individual investigations that can be performed for that
topic
Direct links to analyses: Commonly used AD Module analyses are shown beside the topic they are
used for. If you already know exactly which analysis you want, click on the link to set up that
analysis
Page 176
Data availability: Shows the most recent data available to the AD Module. Click on the arrow to
see a graph of the data availability over the last few days
Using the Advanced Diagnostics Module

To perform an investigation using the Advanced Diagnostics Module:
1. From the Optimization menu, click on Advanced Diagnostics. The Advanced Diagnostics Module
sidebar appears on the right of the window
2. Select a topic to investigate, such as Devices or Roamers. This opens a topic page showing
investigations that can be performed on that topic. Alternatively, you can go directly to a
commonly used analysis using the link beside the relevant topic
3. Select an investigation, such as Device Timing Characteristics or Location Area Update Requests.
If necessary, select the most relevant choice from any sub-pages
4. The AD Module will present you with one or more analyses. These will have some filters already
set up based on the selected investigation
5. If necessary, set filters to select the data you want to investigate (for example, you might be
interested in a specific manufacturer's devices). You can drag existing filters from analyses onto
the Advanced Diagnostics pane
6. Choose the analysis you want to run and drag it onto an appropriate control, such as a map or a
chart
7. (Optional) If the analysis has any parameters that can be changed, click on the P symbol and re-
run the analysis.
Note: To change the filter used for an Advanced Diagnostics analysis on the canvas, edit the filter on
the analysis, not the filter shown in the Advanced Diagnostics pane
Each analysis has some default filters set based on the investigation, but you can change them
either after you drag the analysis onto the Canvas. By default, Advanced Diagnostics Module
investigations inherit from the document filter in the same way as other analyses. For more
information on filter inheritance, see Filter Hierarchy.
Once an Advanced Diagnostics investigation is on the canvas, it can be sorted and edited, and filters
dragged to and from it, in the same way as for a normal GEOperformance analysis. For more
information on working with analyses, see Working with Analyses.
Investigation Reference
Each investigation available as part of the Advanced Diagnostics Module is based on one of the
following analysis templates:
Key Event Timing Distribution CDF: Table, Chart. Shows the cumulative distribution function
(CDF) for the time intervals between the events in the selected pair. The cumulative distribution
function is the probability that the time interval will have a value lower than that shown in the
Time Range column.
Key Event Timing Distribution Histogram: Table, Chart. Shows the number of times that the time
interval between the the selected pair of events is within the Time Range shown.
Note: Both Key Event analysis templates provide parameters that enable you to choose the
maximum and minimum interval times to show, and to combine multiple time intervals to reduce the
number of rows to reduce the size of the final table or graph
Location Area Update Counts: Multi-map. A set of raster maps that display, for each bin, the
Page 177
number of location area update (LAU) attempts as well as the number of such attempts that were
rejected or accepted. Filtering this analysis by cell selects LAUs in call segments that ended in the
selected cell.
LAU Accept Locations: Map, Table. Displays the point location, timestamp and new location area
details for each selected LAU acceptance.
LAU Reject Locations: Map, Table. Displays the point location, timestamp and reason for each
selected LAU rejection.
LAU Request Locations: Map, Table. Displays the point location, timestamp and type of each
selected LAU request.
Measurement Reports for Inter-frequency Events: Multi-map. Displays how many events
triggered by inter-frequency measurements (2A, 2B, 2C, 2D, 2E, 2F) occurred in each bin.
Measurement Reports for Inter-frequency Events Points: Map, Table. Displays the point
location of events triggered by inter-frequency measurements (2 events). By default these are
colored according to their sub-type (A, B, C, D, E, F)
Measurement Reports for Inter-RAT Events: Multi-map. Displays how many events triggered by
inter-RAT measurements (3A, 3B, 3C, 3D) occurred in each bin.
Measurement Reports for Inter-RAT Events Points: Map, Table. Displays the point location of
events triggered by inter-RAT measurements (3 events). By default these are colored according
to their sub-type (A, B, C, D)
Measurement Reports for Intra-frequency Events: Multi-map. Displays how many events
triggered by intra-frequency measurements (1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1E, 1F) occurred in each bin.
Measurement Reports for Intra-frequency Events Points: Map, Table. Displays the point
location and Primary Scrambling Code of events triggered by intra-frequency measurements (1
events). By default these are colored according to their sub-type (A, B, C, D, E, F)
Measurement Reports for Traffic Volume Events: Multi-map. Displays how many events caused
by traffic volume crossing the absolute thresholds (4A, 4B) occurred in each bin.
Measurement Reports for Traffic Volume Events Points: Map, Table. Displays the point location
of events triggered by traffic volume crossing the absolute thresholds (4 events). By default these
are colored according to their sub-type (A, B)
Measurement Reports for Ue Events: Multi-map. Displays how many internal UE measurement
events (6A, 6B, 6C, 6D, 6E) occurred in each bin.
Measurement Reports for Ue Events Points: Map, Table. Displays the point location of internal
UE measurement events (6 events). By default these are colored according to their sub-type (A,
B, C, D, E)
Routing Area Update Counts: Multi-map. A set of raster maps that display, for each bin, the
number of routing area update (RAU) attempts as well as the number of such attempts that were
rejected or accepted.
RAU Accept Locations: Map, Table. Displays the point location, timestamp and type (such as RA
Updated or Combined RA LA Updated) for each selected RAU acceptance.
RAU Complete Locations: Map, Table. Displays the point location, timestamp and new location
details for each selected completed RAU.
RAU Reject Locations: Map, Table. Displays the point location, timestamp and reason for each
selected RAU rejection.
Page 178
RAU Request Locations: Map, Table. Displays the point location, timestamp and type of each
selected RAU request.
Note: In all the Location Area and Routing Area update analyses, filtering by cell selects LAUs/RAUs
in call segments that ended in the selected cell.
RRC Cell State Change Timings CDF: Table, Chart. Displays a CDF of the time that devices spend
in certain states during transitions. For example, the amount of time devices spend in Cell-FACH
when moving from Cell-DCH to Idle
RRC Cell State Change Timings Histogram: Table, Chart. Displays a histogram of the time that
devices spend in certain states during transitions. For example, the amount of time devices spend
in Cell-FACH when moving from Cell-DCH to Idle
Note: Both RRC Cell State Change analysis templates provide parameters that enable you to choose
the maximum and minimum interval times to show, and to combine multiple time intervals to reduce
the number of rows
The AD Module provides some additional filters specifically for these analyses.
LAU/RAU analyses: old codes and new devices
The LAU/RAU analyses show information on previous LAC, MCC and MNC values. In some cases,
such as when a device is switched on for the first time, there are no previous values.
Where there is no value recorded for these codes, the following values are shown:
LAC: 65535 or 65534. These are the translations into decimal of the default hexadecimal values
FFFF and FFFE.
MCC: 1665. This is the translation into decimal of the hexadecimal FFF.
MNC: 165. This is the translation into decimal of the hexadecimal FF.
Filtering AD Investigations
AD Investigations should always be filtered tightly by time period and geographic area, or they may
take a very long time to run without returning any more information. This is because of the way call
segments are cross-referenced between the GEOperformance database and the AD Module
database. For more information, see the Technical Guide.
Investigations performed through the AD Module can use some additional filters to select data for
analysis. These additional filters are:
Event Trigger SC: The downlink scrambling code that triggered the event. This scrambling code
may be any integer between 0 and 511
Layer 3 Event Pair: The specific pair of events to show the time intervals between
Location Update Type: The type of Location Area or Routing Area update specified in the
location/routing update request message sent by the UE
Measurement Report Event Sub Type: The specific event type to show. For example, a
Measurement Reports for Inter-Frequency Events Points analysis, which shows 2 events, could be
filtered to show only 2A events.
Note: Ensure you only filter by sub-types that are available. For example, the Measurement Reports
for Traffic Analysis Points analysis can only show 4A or 4B events
New Location Area Code: The Location Area Code (LAC) sent by the network to the UE during
location update acceptance.
Page 179
New Mobile Country Code: The Mobile Country Code (MCC) sent by the network to the UE
during location update acceptance.
New Mobile Network Code: The Mobile Network Code (MNC) sent by the network to the UE
during location update acceptance.
New Routing Area Code: The Routing Area Code (RAC) sent by the network to the UE during
routing update acceptance.
Old Location Area Code: The Location Area Code (LAC) sent by the UE to the network when
requesting a location update.
Old Mobile Country Code: The country code (MCC) sent by the UE to the network when
Old Mobile Network Code: The network code (MNC) sent by the UE to the network when
Old Routing Area Code: The routing area code (RAC) sent by the UE to the network when
requesting a routing area update.
RRC State Change Order: For RRC Cell State Change Timings analyses, the particular state change
transition to view. For example, Cell-FACH to URA-PCH to Idle
Note: There are a set of default values assigned to that do not have any old codes. You may be able
to use these to identify newly registered devices. For more information, see LAU/RAU analyses: old
codes and new devices
You can also use all the standard GEOperformance analysis filters described in the Analysis
Reference section.
4.4 Reporting
GEOperformance Includes a number of Advanced Features to assist with reporting and presenting
results. Capabilities in GEOperformance include:
Templates, allowing consistent reproduction of common reports and analyses.
Web Reporting, serving reports to an intranet web server.
4.4.1 Using Templates

Templates provide a powerful Reporting feature for easily transporting or processing a group of
Analyses on various Controls and Presentation Canvases. Templates are one of the Document
types that are supported in GEOperformance. Templates can be targeted at analyzing particular
problems, such as pilot pollution, and Templates can be used to create high level reports, such as
system performance for yesterday. The results of the Templates can be stored as Report Documents
on a network drive for people to access, and the results can be emailed to a group of people as they
are processed. All of this functionality is aimed at making GEOperformance more useful on a daily
basis. A set of Templates are shipped with GEOperformance, and the user also has the capability to
modify, create, save, so that Templates are tailored to the users company's work flow.
Tip: A centralized engineering or marketing team can create Templates and distribute them across
the organization.
Tip: Templates can be scheduled to run automatically.
Page 180
Templates in the Data Explorer
GEOperformance is shipped with a set of pre-defined Templates, which can be accessed through
the Data Explorer. Additionally, the user can create their own Templates and store them to the
Global or Local folders.
ariesoGEO default Templates
Note: Default templates are currently only provided for UMTS.
Creating Templates
Virtually any Document in GEOperformance can be saved as a Template by choosing Save As from
the File menu.
File menu Save As submenu
Page 181
Saving Variables with Templates
If the user creates a Variable and wants to apply it to any of the Filters in the Template, proceed
normally when creating the Variable. However, if the user wants GEOperformance to prompt for
values when the Template is opened, then check the Template Prompt box in the Variables Editor.
When the Template is opened, it will prompt the user for any Variables as described in the section
on Templates in the Data Explorer:
Template Prompt option in Variables Editor
Opening Templates
The Templates can be dragged over to the Presentation Canvas, at which point GEOperformance
will ask whether the user wants to Create a New Document or Edit the Template. If Create a New
Document is chosen, then all of the Analyses within the Template will be processed and presented
on the Canvas(es). If the user chooses to Edit the Template, then the Template will be opened on
the Canvas(es) but no results will be presented, which allows an easy edit to the Template
attributes.
Set Variable Values window - Saving a Template
It is possible to create Templates that prompt the user for Variable values. For example, the
Individual IMEI Template will prompt for an IMEI when it opens. Subsequent results will be filtered
to show the performance of that particular IMEI. Highlight the Variable and click Edit, in order to
pick the IMEI that is selected for analyze.
4.4.2 Web Reporting

The Web Reporting function allows GEOperformance reports to be published to a web interface.
These may be reports scheduled or published ad hoc by any user.
Page 182
Web Reporting may be viewed by anyone with access to the Web Reporting URL, served by the
deployed GEOperformance system. This is typically anyone authorized to use the LAN hosting the
GEOperformance system. By default the URL is http://server-name/geoweb
Web Reporting contains a number of distinct items of functionality:
Publishing Web Reports are based upon GEOperformance documents presenting Map, Table, Text
Boxes, Legends and Chart controls across multiple canvases. Reports can be published in an ad-
hoc manner or can be scheduled.
Viewing Web Reports provides the ability to view One-Off or Scheduled Reports.
Your Customers is a reporting capability to monitor the performance experienced by a set of
VIPs. VIP reporting is configured using the VIP list and is password protected.
Monitoring provides visibility regarding GEOperformance system performance. This access is
controlled by user access rights.
Note: In order to use the Arieso Support portal you must have a self service account set up by your
Arieso support contact.
Note: Web reports always contain encrypted IMSI and IMEI data.
Publishing Web Reports

A web report is simply a representation of a GEO document that you can view using a web browser.
You can view the presentation canvases and the controls on the canvases (maps, tables, charts,
legends and text boxes) along with any analysis results, and interact with these controls. However
the functionality is generally more limited than that provided by GEOperformance.
There are 2 ways to publish a web report: create a one-off web report directly from
GEOperformance, or schedule a recurring web report for a GEO template (e.g. once per week).
Publishing a One-Off Web Report

To publish the GEO document you are currently viewing in GEOperformance, click the Publish to
Web button in the Home ribbon tab:
Publish To Web Ribbon Button
The Publish to Web Dialog appears and attempts to connect to the Web Data Server process on the
web server machine.
A colored bar near the top of the dialog shows the current status of the connection to the Web
Data Server:
If it is colored green then all is good and you are good to publish.
If it is colored red then there is a problem and a button will be shown so you can see the details
of the problem (e.g. if the network is down, the Web Data Server isn’t running or the
configuration is incorrect).
Now enter a few fields to help distinguish your report once it is published:
Page 183
Name: This is required for a report to be published. The name of the report (this doesn’t have to
be unique like it did in the old system).
Description: Additional information to help users understand what is contained within the report.
Tags: Optional tags (strings) to help users search for certain reports. Previously used tags can be
selected from a list.
Make Public: If this is checked then all users can view your report. If not checked then only you
can view the report.
Click on the Publish button to begin the publishing process. This may take several seconds to several
minutes depending on how much data needs to be copied to the web server.
Once publish has finished you will be presented with a hyperlink to the published report on the web.
Click the link to view the web report, or you can right-click on the link to copy the link shortcut to
the clipboard should you wish to email it to a colleague.
Scheduling a Recurring Web Report

To schedule a GEO template to be published on a recurring basis use the Add Scheduled Task dialog
in GEOperformance (click on the Schedule Report button in the Home ribbon tab). For more
information see Scheduling Analyses.
Viewing Web Reports

To view a web report either follow the provided link once you have published a one-off web report,
or go to the URL provided by your administrator and select the Reports tab to access the published
reports (By default the URL is http://server-name/geoweb/).
Home Page
Click on the Home tab in the Web View, you will see the Front Page report (if one has been set up).
This is a scheduled web report that the administrator has chosen to be the front page report from
within the GEOperformance Admin Console. It could be a small but useful report, maybe run each
day, providing an overview of system KPIs, or other useful information. The example shows a Front
Page with 4 presentation canvases configured (Drop & Block Locations, KPIs, Usage and Network).
Page 184
Web Reporting - Front Page .
Authentication
Initially you will be viewing the Web View anonymously as you will not be logged in. This means you
can view all public reports , including the Front Page report , but not any private reports, the Your
Customers tab or the Monitoring tab.
Click on the Login link in the top-right of the page to log in and you will be logged in automatically
without being prompted to provide login credentials.
Web View - Login
It uses the same Windows Authentication system that GEOperformance uses, along with the roles
that each user has. Your username is displayed in the top-right hand corner.
Timeline
Scheduled reports include a timeline. This enables the user to visually see when a report was
created. The orange mark indicates which report is currently being viewed.
Web Reporting - Timeline
It is also possible to get a thumbnail view of each scheduled report by mousing over the and a
thumb nail of each occurrence of the report.
Page 185
Web Reporting - Timeline Thumbnail
Your Customers (VIPs)

Assuming you have logged in and have sufficient privileges to see VIP data, clicking on the Your
customers tab will show the customers (VIPs) overview page:
Web Reporting - Your Customers
Note: The Show filter is used to select the type of information to to be viewed. Options include
"Customers with minutes of use", "Customers with drops", "Customers with blocks" or "All".
Note: The Display filter is used to select Your Customers with a specific handset type.
Note: Columns may be sorted.
The main area contains a table, each row containing a VIP, with various statistics that cover the
last 48 hours.
The Name column shows the name of the VIP (as it was imported into the VIP lists)
The Last Seen column shows the last time that VIP was seen on the network. This could have
been a successful voice call or data connection, not just a problem (drop/block) event.
The Last Voice Drop column shows the last time that VIP had a voice drop.
The Voice MoU shows the minutes of use for voice calls the VIP has made in the last 48 hours.
The Voice Drops, Voice Blocks, Data Drops and Data Blocks columns contain the number of those
events that have occurred during the last 48 hours. To help draw your attention to recent and
recurrent problems, icons and cell shading have been used:
o Depending on the type of problem event and the quantity that have occurred in the last 48
hours, a number of icons are shown. A key is shown at the top to explain what the color, shape
and number represent. The more icons, the more issues have occurred.
o If one of the problem events has happened recently (in the last 3 hours) then the cell
background is shaded in various shades of orange, along with the VIP’s name. This is to help
draw your attention to recent issues.
Click on the VIP’s name to show more details about that VIP’s problems.
Page 186
’Your Customers’ Details Page
When you click on a VIP’s name it takes you to the details page for that VIP:
Your customers details
A summary table at the top reproduces what is seen in the main table on the ‘Your customers’
overview page
The issues are shown in a list on the left, in reverse-chronological order, starting with the most
recent:
o An ID for the issue, starting at 1.
o The date and time of the issue
o The technology (LTE, UMTS or GSM)
o The service that was affected (Voice, Data, Network (signaling) or a combination)
o Whether the issue was a drop or block.
o You can choose to show the issues from a specific domain, such as Voice or Network
(signaling), by choosing from the drop-box above the issues list:
When you click on an issue the layer 3 details are shown in a table in the middle of the page.
The location of each issue is shown in a map control on the right of the page.
o A numbered marker is shown for each issue.
o Clicking on the issue in the list centers the map on the location of that issue.
o Clicking on the numbered marker in the map selects that issue in the list and shows that issue’s
layer 3 information.
It is also possible to filter Your customers issues by device. This is done by selecting the device from
the the Device Filter dropdown.
Page 187
Your Customers Device
VIP List Configuration

In order to configure VIP Web Reporting a public VIP List must be present. The VIP list can only be
entered by an Administrator through the GEOperformance Administrator Console.
ariesoGEO Admininstrator Console
Once in the Console the List Names tab can be used to import a new VIP list.
To import the list open List Names. To create a new VIP list click on Import.
List Management within the Administartor Console
Import a list, of type VIP, comprising of a list of IMSIs and optionally Names or other labels.
Page 188
List Import dialog - VIP
To import the List set the Value to the column containing IMEI, and create list names from the other
column.
Note: The system has to be configured to collect VIP data in order for the VIP results to appear i.e.
its not sufficient to just import a VIP list.
Reports
Latest Reports
These are shown in a table on the left and are grouped into 4 tabs:
Daily – recent daily reports that have been published in the last day sorted by descending Created
Date.
Weekly – recent weekly reports that have been published in the last 7 days sorted by descending
Created Date.
Monthly – recent monthly reports that have been published in the last month sorted by
descending Created Date.
Recent one-off reports – one-off reports that have been published in the last 7 days sorted by
descending Created Date.
Web Reporting - Reports Page
Favourites
When you are logged in you can set individual reports to be your favourites. To do this just click on
Page 189
the white star next to the report and it will become yellow to indicate it is a favourite.
The report then appears in the Your favourites table at the top of the page, allowing you to quickly
find reports that you frequently reference. To remove a favorite click the yellow start again (it will
turn white).
GeoMonitoring - Your Favourites
Deleting Reports
To delete a web report just click on the red circle with a white X next to the report:
You can only delete reports that you have published. An administrator user (a user with the
GeoAdmin role) can delete all reports.
When you delete a report any analysis results that the web report referenced will also be deleted as
long as no other web reports reference the same analysis result data files.
Downloading Reports
Click the PDF icon to view or download a report as PDF.
Modify Report
To modify a report click the Modify report icon.
Various field can be modified including: Name, Description and Tags. It can also change its public
status.
Page 190
Web Reporting - Modify Reports
Note: Recurring reports cannot be modified/edited.

Searching
The Latest Report table only lists recently published reports. In order to see older reports you must
search for them. To do this use the Search box in the top-right hand corner of the Reports page.
There is also an advanced search option:
Web Reporting - searching reports
Enter the search term in the search text box. It will search the Name, Description, Tags and Creator
of the published web reports for matches.
The Advanced Search enables searches to be performed based on a relative date, e.g. last 7 days, or
between specific dates. The Advance Search also requires the report Recurrence and report Type to
be selected.
The results from the search are shown in a separate web page:
Web Reporting - searching results
The required report can be selected from the hyperlink in the Name column.
Page 191
Report Page
When you click on a web report link to view the web report you are presented with a view similar to
that seen in GEOperformance:
Web Reporting - Report example
Maps
The map control uses Bing Maps to supply the road/satellite imagery.
The map layers visible in GEOperformance appear in the left pane. The symbol, the symbol color
and the name of the layer all appear as they do in GEO.
Hovering over the colourscheme icon shows the colourscheme values.
Hovering over the filter icon shows the filter settings used when the analysis was run.
The slider bar controls the opacity for each map layer. They default to 50% so that you can see
the underlying Bing Maps layer.
Site/Cells are rendered using the same settings as were in GEOperformance (including network
themes).
o There is no tooltip information for these.
o Only the sites/cells for the area that you have analysis results are displayed (with a 5km
margin).
o If you zoom out sufficiently in the map control the sites/cells will eventually disappear to avoid
the control becoming cluttered.
o Polygons are displayed.
Spiders are currently not published to the web.
It is possible to hide the analyses panel and therefore provide more real-estate for the maps. This is
done by dragging the slider as illustrated below:
Page 192
Web Reporting - Hide Analyses
Within a report it is possible to search for locations on the map by typing a location, street name,
postcode, zip code etc. into the search box on the map component. The map then centers this
location in it view.
Web Reporting - Map Search
Tables
The table control displays the results of table analyses. To prevent performance issues it currently
only shows 100 rows at a time.
Click on the First, Previous, Next and Last links in the top-right hand corner to change which 100
rows you view.
You can sort the results by clicking on a column header. Click again to sort the other direction
(ascending/descending).
You can Export to CSV and Excel, similar functionality to that in GEOperformance. This exports all
the table data, not just the rows you are viewing.
Any column formatting specified in the analysis XML file (not the formatting set in
GEOperformance) such as percentage or number of decimal places will be used.
Hovering over the filter icon in the bottom right hand corner shows the filter settings used when
the analysis was run.
Hovering over the colourscheme icon shows the colourscheme values in the table.
Charts
The chart canvas control provides an interactive control:
Page 193
Web Reporting - Reports chart
The legend shows the available series is shown in the top right hand corner.
Click on the legend entries to show/hide the series. Hidden series are greyed-out in the legend
and don’t appear in the main chart view. This way you can focus on the series you are interested
in. The chart rescales to fit the visible series.
Series colors come through from GEOperformance.
The chart types available in Web View are: Area, Bar, Column, Line, Pie, Point.
Legends
Any legend controls are visible in web reports:
Chart legend
colourschemes and Filters are the same as GEOperformance.

You can collapse/expand each item.
Text Boxes
Text boxes are also visible in web reports:
The text, font, font size, text alignment are all preserved from GEOperformance.
Canvas color
If you choose to change the canvas background color in ariesoGEO, only the first color of the linear
gradient will be used as a solid color background in the web.
Email Subscriptions
If you subscribe to a scheduled report, GEO will send you an email every time the report is run. This
email will include a PDF attachment of the report, and a link to view it on GEOweb.
To subscribe to a scheduled report simply click the envelope icon.
Page 194
Web Reporting - Email Subscription
If the subscription is successful, the envelope will turn yellow. If it turns yellow with a warning of
"No email address verified", then add a valid email address in the My Details tab.
Subscribed scheduled reports can be reviewed in the My Details page or on the Administration page
(under User Administration).
Note: In order for this feature to work, GEO must be configured to have an SNMP connection to a
mail server that emails out the report notifications.
Google Earth Reports

Web reports also stores the Google Earth Reports had can be run assuming Google Earth is installed.
The icons below illustrates a Google Earth Report.
Google
Report Icon
The Advanced Search can be used to located previously generated Google Earth Reports:
Web Reporting - Google Earth Report Search
Web Reporting - Google Earth Report Search Results
My Details
The My Details tab shows the users details, as well as the registered email addresses and email
subscriptions:
Page 195
Web Reporting - My Details
Email subscriptions may be canceled by clicking on the yellow envelope.
Administration
There are two Administration pages, Recurring Reports and User Administration.
Recurring Reports
The Recurring Reports provides a summary of the number of reports, as well as the number of
subscribers to the reports.
Web Reporting - Administration Page
By selecting the name of the report, e.g. daily summary, a list of Report Instances, as well as
subscribed users (email) can be seen. Individual reports can be deleted, as well as subscriptions
added or removed.
Web Reporting - Recurring Reports Instances
User Administration
The User Administration page enables users to be added and removed. In addition, the number of
email addresses and subscriptions can also be reviewed.
Page 196
Web Reporting - User Administration
Page 197
GeoMonitoring
The Monitoring page is only visible when a user is logged in and that user is an Administrator (i.e. has
the GeoAdmin role associated with their user account):
Web Reporting - Monitoring
Information provided includes:

Loading status (last period received, parsed, geolocated, loaded)
Loading issues (missing files, missing sectors, overload warnings)
System utilization
A simple traffic light color scheme provides indication of system health.
4.5 Correlation Module

The Correlation Module offers a single view of equipment faults and cell performance, empowering
engineers to monitor and troubleshoot network regions and optimize new sites more quickly and
effectively, improving network responsiveness and customer experience.
The Correlation Module provides:
Immediately visible information on the alarm or configuration status for all cells shown on the
Map Control
Details of the alarm history of a cell, or of any configuration changes applied to it, available by
clicking on that cell in the Map Control or in an analysis
Details of the alarm history and configuration changes for a cell's neighbors, enabling engineers to
see at a glance any alarms or changes that might increase the load on the that cell
Analyses that show alarm details in specific areas, comparisons between cells, information on
changes and similar useful tools
You can use the Correlation Module to:
Immediately see whether network problems seen in GEOperformance are related to equipment
faults
Quickly identify issues that might impact VIPs
Quickly compare the configuration of similar cells in order to identify possible improvements
Complete daily monitoring tasks far more quickly
Page 198
Understand the context of network issues
Note: The Correlation Module requires the Correlation license. It is currently available for GSM and
UMTS
4.5.1 Viewing Cell Status on the Map

You can use the Correlation Module to view alarms or updates for each cell on the Map Control.
To show alarms and updates on a map:
1. Set a Time Period using the Canvas Filter
2. Open the map
3. Check the CM Updates layer or one or both of the Alarms layers
Note: You cannot view updates and alarms at the same time on the same map
CM Updates
When the CM Updates layer is checked, the way cells are shown in the map control changes to
indicate whether there were any network changes to each in the specified time period.
Note: If you have not specified a Time Period filter in the Canvas filter, you will not be able to see CM
Updates.
You can hover over the cell to see the site pop-up. This shows exactly which cells in a group had
network updates.
For more information, press SPACE to open the Sector Select pane in a tab at the bottom of the
window. Then click the Correlate button to open the Correlation Module pane with information for
a specific cell.
Alarms
When the Alarms layer is checked, the way cells are shown in the map control changes to indicate
whether there were any alarms on each cell in the specified time period.
Note: If you have not specified a Time Period filter in the Canvas or Document filter, you will not be
able to see Alarms.
Page 199
Map control Alarm layer showing alarms on three cells
Check the Alarms layer to see all alarms that occurred on a cell during the canvas filter time period.
Check the Active layer to see only the alarms that are still active.
You can hover over the cell to see the site pop-up. This shows exactly which cells in a group have
alarms applied to them.
For more information, press SPACE to open the Sector Select pane in a tab at the bottom of the
window. Then click the Correlate button to open the Correlation Module pane with information for
a specific cell.
4.5.2 Viewing Details and Analyzing

The Correlation Pane shows a summary of alarm and configuration information for the selected cell.
From here, you can run more detailed analyses to investigate individual topics further.
There are several different ways to access the Correlation Pane from within GEOperformance:
Use the Select icon to right-click on a cell and open a cell analysis menu. Click the Correlate
option to open a Correlation Module tab for each selected cell
When mousing over a cell in the map control to view the cell tooltip, press SPACE to open the cell
tooltip as a Cell Group Details tab at the bottom of the window. Click the Correlate button for a
cell to open a Correlation Module tab for that cell
Note: When viewing the Active Alarms layer, do not attempt to correlate active alarms from the Cell
Group Details pane. The Correlation Module will inherit the time period from the canvas, and may
not show the latest alarms.
In the Network Search window, select one or more cells and click Correlate. A Correlation
Module tab will appear for each selected cell
If a table analysis includes a Label column, right-click on any cell label and select Correlate
The Correlation Pane opens at the right-hand side of the GEOperformance window, with a tab for
each selected cell.
Page 200
The Correlation Module User Interface
By default the Correlation Module pane is shown as a pane at the right-hand side of the screen,
though like other panes it can be undocked and moved.
GEOperformance with Correlation Module in use
In the above image, alarms are visible on the map, Cell Group Details are displayed as a separate
window underneath, and both cells are open as separate tabs in the Correlation Module pane to the
right.
Page 201
The CM Module Cell Details page
The initial page shown is the Cell Details page. This is a high-level overview of the areas that can be
investigated for a specific cell.
Cell label: The label of the cell you are currently working with
Time period: Alarms and configuration changes are only shown for the specified time period.
This time period is inherited from the Canvas filter
Topic: Click on a topic to see a page of individual investigations that can be performed for that
topic. Available topics are described in the Analyzing Topics section
Tab bar: You can work with multiple cells at once. Click the tab bar at the bottom of the pane to
change to a different open cell
Analyzing Topics
The topics available in the Correlation Module are:
Alarms Summary: Investigate the alarms that were active on the cell for the specified time
period
Config Updates: See more information on the configuration updates, or compare configuration
information with another cell
Neighbor Correlation: Compare a cell's alarm records or configuration details with those of its
neighbors
All Cells: Run investigations on multiple cells, for example to find out which cells have the most
alarms
Page 202
External tools: Launch an external software tool using details for this cell. In order to use this, an
external tool must be set up in the GEOperformance configuration
Investigating topics
To run a correlation analysis:
1. Choose a topic, such as Alarms Summary or Neighbor Correlation, to see the analyses that are
available for that topic
2. Click the filter icon to set any necessary filters. For example, the Cell Parameter Comparison
analysis usually requires you to set at least one additional cell for comparison. By default, filters
are set to the current cell and the date, area and time set by the canvas or document filter
3. Drag the analysis onto the canvas, or onto an appropriate control
Note: To change the filter used for a Correlation Module analysis on the canvas, edit the filter on the
analysis, not the filter shown in the Correlation Pane
Once a Correlation Module analysis is on the canvas, it can be sorted and edited, and filters dragged
to and from it, in the same way as for a normal GEOperformance analysis. For more information
on working with analyses, see Working with Analyses.
Correlation Analysis Reference

The following analyses are available within the Correlation Module:
Alarm Details: Table. Shows information about the alarms that were active within the selected
time period, such as the alarm message, the time the alarm was raised, and the time the alarm
was cleared (if it was).
Alarms Loading Summary: Table, Chart. Shows how many alarms of each severity were loaded
into GEOperformance in each hour.
Cell Parameter Comparison: Table. Provides a side-by-side comparison of the configuration of
the selected cell or cells.
Config Updates: Table. Shows the configuration changes that were made to the selected cell
during the selected time period.
Configuration Parameter Audit: Table. Shows network elements such as cells and RNCs that
have settings outside the ranges specified for your network. For more information, see
Configuration Parameter Audit.
Parameter Consistency Check Summary: Table. Shows the number of settings that are outside
the specified ranges, broken down by network element type and parameter.
Note: The Configuration Parameter Audit and Parameter Consistency Check Summary are only
available if your system has the Golden Audit feature installed
Top N Worst Cells by Alarms Count: Table, Chart. Displays the cells with the highest numbers of
alarms active during the specified period. This is determined purely by number of alarms, and is
not weighted by severity.
Filtering Correlation Analyses
Analyses performed through the Correlation Module can use some additional filters to select data
for analysis. These additional filters are:
Alarm Severity: Use this filter to analyze information only for alarms of a certain severity, such as
Critical.
Alarm Type: Use this filter to analyze information only for alarms of a certain type, such as
Page 203
Equipment Malfunction or Configuration or Customizing Error.
You can also use some of the standard GEOperformance analysis filters described in the Analysis
Reference section, for example to filter by Time Period and Geographic Area.
Configuration Parameter Audit

For UMTS networks, the Configuration Parameter Audit analysis can be used to show detailed
information about network elements such as cells and RNCs that have settings outside the ranges
specified for your network. When combined with other investigations in the Correlation module
suite, or analyses such as the X Feeder analysis, this provides fast identification of problems caused
by cell misconfigurations.
The Configuration Parameter Audit is available from the All Cells topic in the Correlation Module
pane.
Example of the Configuration Parameter Audit analysis, showing cells and controllers whose parameters differ from the recommended
network settings
The recommended values used in the Configuration Parameter Audit analysis are specific to your
network. These values must be uploaded to your database by Arieso personnel before you can use
this analysis.
Note: This analysis is only available if you have the Golden Audit feature installed
Page 204
5 Analysis Reference
This section briefly describes the standard analyses and filters that are available. For more in-depth
information, such as the database tables each analysis runs against and what data it shows, see the
Technical Guide document.
Standard analyses can be combined to provide more complex and nuanced information, using the
Grid Calculator. You can also drill down into analyses that show individual connection segments,
such as Points analyses, for detailed Layer 3 information. For more information on ways to use the
standard analyses, see Advanced Features.
Some analyses may show a large number of metrics (columns). You can set which of these are
visible by default from File > Options > Presentation Canvas > Visible Columns.
5.1 Analyses
GEOperformance's Analyses enable the user to drill down into the network performance and review
results in a wide variety of dimensions. To run an analysis, drag a Map, Table or Chart control onto
the Presentation Canvas and drag the analysis or analyses onto the control. Alternatively, table
analyses can also be dragged directly onto the canvas.
Note: Most analyses can only be used with specific controls. Dragging an analysis onto an
incompatible control will result in a warning message. For more information, see Data Explorer Icons
Analyses are classified according to technology. Current options are:

Common: Analyses that provide a view of calls on multiple technologies, such as GSM and UMTS
GSM
UMTS
LTE
WiFi
5.1.1 Common Analyses

Common analyses are found in the Data Explorer pane, in the Analyses (Common) folder. Analyses
are grouped into similar analysis types:
Page 205
Data Explorer - Analyses (Common)
The following table describes the contents of the Data Explorer Analysis folders for Common
analyses:
Administrative Analyses that track which analyses are used most
Calls Analyses showing individual connections and connection

segments
Device and Analyses providing KPIs for individual subscribers and device
Subscriber types.
The Device and Subscriber analyses require the
DeviceManagement or SubscriberManagement licenses.
Network Analyses showing information about network sites
Performance Analyses providing information on data volume and throughput,

and drop and block rates
Points The locations of blocks, drops, and individual connections

(broken down into segments)
Administrative
The Administrative analyses available in the Common folders are:
Daily Usage Summary: Table. The number of analysis queries run each day
Usage Summary By Analysis: Table. The number of queries run for each analysis
Usage Summary: Table. The number of queries run by each user
Calls
The Calls analyses should usually be filtered very specifically and run over a small time period, such
as one or two days. Otherwise the very large amount of data to be searched through will mean
they take a long time to return results, and may slow down the system for other users.
The Calls analyses available in the Common folders are:
Individual Connection Segments: Table. The details of every call segment in the chosen area
Subscriber Connection: Table. The details of every call made in the chosen area, grouped by
Page 206
subscriber
Note: These reports may contain Sensitive Personal Information (IMSI and IMEI data). Depending on
your user role configuration this data may be encrypted.
Device and Subscriber

The Device and Subscriber analyses should usually be filtered very specifically and run over a small
time period, such as one or two days. Otherwise the very large amount of data to be searched
through will mean they take a long time to return results, and may slow down the system for other
users.
The Device and Subscriber analyses available in the Common folders are:
Device
o Unidentified Devices: Table. Shows active devices that are not present in the TAC list, and the
number of subscribers using them.
Network
The Network analyses available in the Common folders are:
Active Network Sites: Table. Displays a list of the locations of all sites within the selected area.
Performance
The Performance analyses available in the Common folders are:
Data KPIs by Frequency Band: Table. Shows overall volume and throughput for each frequency
band in each bin.
Data KPIs by Service Group: Table. Shows overall volume and throughput for each service group
in each bin.
Data KPIs: Multi-map. Shows overall volume and throughput for each bin.
Performance KPIs by Frequency Band: Table. Shows overall drop and block information for
each frequency band in each bin.
Performance KPIs by Service Group: Table. Shows overall drop and block information in each
service group for each bin.
Performance KPIs: Multi-map. Shows overall drop and block information for each bin.
Subscriber Data Usage vs Time: Table. Displays information on individual subscriber data
volumes over time, on each technology. Use the Time grouping parameter to set whether the
KPIs should be summarized over each 15 minutes, each hour, or each day.
Top N Subscribers by Volume: Table. Shows the subscribers with the highest aggregate data
usage across all technologies.
Points
The Points analyses should usually be filtered very specifically and run over a small time period, such
as one or two days. Otherwise the very large amount of data to be searched through will mean
they take a long time to return results, and may slow down the system for other users.
The Points analyses available in the Common folders are:
Block Locations: Map, Table. The point location of every block on all technologies.
Page 207
Drop Locations: Map, Table. The point location of every drop on all technologies.
Locations: Map, Table. The point location of every call segment on all techologies.
Note: Various reports may contain Sensitive Personal Information (IMSI and IMEI data). Depending
on your user role configuration this data may be encrypted or unencrypted.
5.1.2 GSM Analyses

GSM analyses are found in the Data Explorer pane, in the Analyses (GSM) folder. Analyses are
grouped into similar analysis types:
Data Explorer - Analyses (GSM)
The following table describes the contents of the Data Explorer Analysis folders for GSM analyses:
Administrative Analyses providing insight into the status of data loading on the
system
Busy Hour Analyses identifying the location and seconds of use of the
hour when the most traffic occurred on the system
Call Table Map analyses showing performance and data metrics for
individual call segments
Calls Analyses showing information such as data volumes for

complete calls, or more detailed information such as
completion codes and data volumes for each individual call
segment
Centroid Analyses displaying the mean location of all selected call

segments.
Device and Analyses providing information such as RxQual and RxLev,

Subscriber drops and blocks, and other KPIs for individual subscribers and
device types.
The Device and Subscriber analyses require the
DeviceManagement or SubscriberManagement licenses.
Failures Analyses showing the reasons for drops and blocks.
Network Tables showing the details of active network cells and neighbor
Page 208
lists.
Optimization Analyses providing insight into the network, such as frequency

reuse, missing neighbors, and the probable effects of antenna
changes.
Performance Information relating to cell performance, such as volume,

throughput, block and drop rates, and how KPIs change with
timing advance.
Points Analyses showing the point locations of key events such as

drops, blocks, and specific call segments.
RF Analyses based on RxQual and RxLev, such as best cell and

strongest cell footprints and KPIs, or statistics such as FER and
pathloss for the TCH.
Roamers Analyses providing details of the failures and KPIs experienced

by roamers in the network.
Subscriber and Analyses that provide insight into relative cell performance and
Cell the experience of individual subscribers.
Time Series Analyses showing a summary of the change in KPIs for an area,
such as volume and throughput, blocks and drops and so on,
over hours or days.
VIP Analyses relating to the location, volume and duration of calls

made by subscribers on your VIP list.
The VIP analyses require the SubscriberManagement and
VIPManagement licenses.
Administrative
The Administrative analyses available in the GSM folders are:
BSC Summary: Table. The most recent period for which GEOperformance detected data files,
and the most recent period for which files were loaded into the database, for each BSC
GSM RPMO Errors:
Loading Errors: Table. The loading errors that occurred for each BSC in each fifteen-minute time
period.
Loading Summary: Table. The data that was loaded for each BSC for each fifteen-minute time
period.
Loading Summary Daily: Table. How many fifteen-minute periods were loaded into the
database on each day for each BSC.
Loading Summary GGLR Rows: Table, Chart. How many call segments were loaded from
geolocater output files into the database for each fifteen-minute period.
Loading Summary GGLR Rows Daily: Table. How many call segments were loaded from
geolocater output files into the database on each day.
Page 209
Loading Summary GGLR Size: Table, Chart. How many MB of data were loaded from geolocater
output files into the database for each fifteen-minute period for each BSC.
Loading Summary Parsed Size: Table, Chart. How many MB of BSC data were parsed during
each fifteen-minute period for each BSC.
Loading Summary Parsed Size Daily: Table. The total number of MB of BSC data parsed on each
day.
Loading Summary Period: Table. The total number of call segments and calls loaded into the
database during each fifteen-minute period.
Loading Summary Pivot: Table, Chart. How many files were parsed during each fifteen-minute
period for each BSC.
Busy Hour
The Busy Hour analyses available in the GSM folders are:
Busy Hour (Daily BSC): Table. The hour of each day with the greatest average seconds of use for
each selected BSC.
Busy Hour (Daily Server): Table. The hour of each day with the greatest average seconds of use
for each selected cell.
Busy Hour (Daily System): Table. The hour of each day with the greatest average seconds of use
across the filter supplied for the entire GEOperformance area.
Busy Hour (Single BSC): Table. The single hour across all days that has the greatest average
seconds of use for each selected BSC.
Busy Hour (Single Server): Table. The single hour across all days that has the greatest average
seconds of use for each selected cell.
Busy Hour (Single System): Table. The single hour across all days that has the greatest average
seconds of use across the filter supplied for the entire GEOperformance area.
Call Table
The Call Table analyses should usually be filtered very specifically and run over a short time period,
such as one or two days. Otherwise the very large amount of data to be searched through will
mean they take a long time to return results, and may slow down the system for other users.
The Call Table analyses available in the GSM folders are:
Call Table Analyses (Extra): Multi-layer map. A set of map layers showing information about the
percentage of bad RxQual, and the BCCH RxLev.
Call Table Analyses: Multi-layer map. A set of map layers showing information about different
performance metrics such as drops and blocks, traffic volume, and TCH RxLev.
Call Table Data KPIs: Multi-layer map. A set of map layers showing information about different
volume and throughput metrics.
Indoor Outdoor Traffic: Multi-layer map. The number, data volume, and percentage minutes of
use for indoor and outdoor traffic.
Note: The Indoor Outdoor Traffic analysis requires the IndoorOutdoor license.
Mobility: Multi-layer map. The percentage of total calls, minutes of use, drops, and blocks
corresponding to different mobility classifications (stationary, pedestrian, vehicular).
Page 210
TCH RF Measurements: Multi-layer map. A raster map showing information about the traffic
channel signal, such as quality, power and pathloss.
Worst N Cells (Blocks) (Call Table): Table, Chart. The cells with the highest numbers of blocked
calls. For a faster-running summary version of this analysis, see Subscriber and Cell.
Worst N Cells (Drops) (Call Table): Table, Chart. The cells with the highest numbers of dropped
Calls
The Calls analyses should usually be filtered very specifically and run over a short time period.
The Calls analyses available in the GSM folders are:
Call Count (Table): Table, Chart. Shows, for each service, the number of calls, drops and blocks.
Calls Summary: Table. Shows details such as volumes, throughputs, and end reasons for each
call.
Individual Call Segments: Table. Shows detailed information such as completion codes and data
volumes for each individual call segment.
Note: The Calls Summary and Individual Call Segments analyses require the Subscriber and Device
licenses.
Centroid
The Centroid analyses should usually be filtered very specifically and run over a small time period.
The Centroid analyses available in the GSM folders are:
Centroid of multiple locations: Map, Table. Displays the central point of all the selected
segments, also called the mean position.
Weighted centroid of multiple locations: Map, Table. Displays the central point of all the
selected segments. Each segment is weighted by the confidence of its geolocated position.

The Device and Subscriber analyses should usually be filtered very specifically and run over a small
time period.
Note: The Device and Subscriber analyses depend on list summarization. If a specific device or
subscriber is not available in the filter, this may indicate that list summarization has not occurred
recently.
The Device and Subscriber analyses available in the GSM folders are:
Performance Against Time: Table, Chart. Lists RF performance and KPIs summed or averaged for
each fifteen-minute time period for the selected subscribers and/or devices
Device
Device Comparison
o Device Comparison: Table. RF performance and KPIs summed or averaged for each type of
device within the filter.
o Device Comparison By Cell: Table. RF performance and KPIs summed or averaged for each cell
for the selected individual device types.
o Device List Comparison: Table. RF performance and KPIs summed or averaged by the list each
Page 211
device belongs to. Device lists are normally set up to correspond to manufacturers, in which
case this analysis will show KPIs summed or averaged by manufacturer.
o Device List Comparison By Cell: Table. RF performance and KPIs summed or averaged for
each cell for the list each device belongs to.
Device Time Series
o Device Comparison trend over time: Table. Lists RF performance and KPIs summed or
averaged for each fifteen-minute time period for the selected device types.
o Device List Comparison trend over time: Table. RF performance and KPIs summed or
averaged for each fifteen-minute time period for the list the devices belong to.
Unique Devices
o Unique Device Counts: Table. Information about each type of mobile device in the network,
such as how many unique devices are in use, the services they are using, and the drops and
blocks they are experiencing.
o Unique Device Maps: Multi-layer map. Shows the number of each type of mobile device in
each bin, whether they used voice or data RABs, and how many devices experienced drops and
blocks.
o Unique Devices: Table. Shows the number of each type of mobile device in each bin, the
number using voice or data RABs, and the number that experienced drops and blocks.
o Unique Devices Hourly Trend: Table, Chart. A summary of the number of unique devices
present in the selected segments during each hour of the selected time period.
Device Performance Summary Per Individual: Table. RF performance and KPIs for every single
device of the type or types specified in the filter. Arieso recommends that you set several
optional filters to limit the data returned.
Note: These analyses require the DeviceManagement license.
Subscriber
Subscriber Comparison
o Subscriber Comparison: Table. RF performance and KPIs summed or averaged for each
individual subscriber.
o Subscriber Comparison By Cell: Table. RF performance and KPIs summed or averaged for each
cell for the selected individual subscribers.
o Subscriber List Comparison: RF performance and KPIs summed or averaged by the list each
subscriber belongs to. For example, if subscribers were listed by state or province, this analysis
would show KPIs summed or averaged by state or province.
o Subscriber List Comparison By Cell: RF performance and KPIs summed or averaged for each
cell for the list each subscriber belongs to.
Subscriber Time Series
o Subscriber Comparison trend over time: Table. RF performance and KPIs summed or
averaged for each fifteen-minute time period for the selected individual subscribers.
o Subscriber List Comparison trend over time: Table. RF performance and KPIs summed or
averaged for each fifteen-minute time period for the list the subscribers belong to.
Unique Subscribers
o Unique Subscriber Count: Map. The number of unique subscribers (based on IMSI) in each bin.
Page 212
Additional raster layers show the number of unique users experiencing blocks or drops, or using
data or voice connections.
o Unique Subscriber Count: Table. The number of unique subscribers (based on IMSI) in each
bin. Also shows the number of unique users experiencing blocks or drops, or using data or
voice connections.
o Unique Subscriber Count by Cell: Table. The number of unique subscribers (based on IMSI) in
each cell. Also shows the number of unique users experiencing blocks or drops, or using data or
voice connections.
Subscriber Performance Summary Per Individual: Table. RF performance and KPIs for every
single device of the type or types specified in the filter.
Note: These analyses require the SubscriberManagement license.
Device and Subscriber Comparison and List Comparison
If these analyses do not return results for a subscriber or device list, that may indicate that the list
summary has not been run for the chosen list.
The list summary normally runs once per day, overnight. That means that information may not be
available for the current day or for a newly created list.
If required, the list summary can be run manually. For more information see the Technical Guide.
Failures
The Failures analysis available in the GSM folders is:
Failure Reasons: Table, Chart. This analysis shows the number of calls that terminated with each
specific end reason code, such as Drop (Radio Interference Message Failure) or Block (No Radio
Resource Available).
Note: Unknown and Unspecified termination reasons are not reported by this analysis.
Network
The Network analyses available in the GSM folders are:
Active Network Cells: Table. Details such as latitude/longitude, azimuth, base station power and
so on for all selected cells.
On Air GSM to GSM Neighbors List: Table. Lists GSM cells that have a GSM neighbor, and shows
details of both cells.
On Air GSM to UMTS Neighbors List: Table. Lists GSM cells that have a UMTS neighbor, and
shows details of both cells.
Optimization
The Optimization analyses available in the GSM folders are:
Antenna Tuning
Note: These analyses require the AntennaTuning license.
o Change Azimuth: Multi-map. Shows the projected KPIs for a single cell if the azimuth is
changed. Use parameters to choose the cell and the azimuth change to model. The azimuth
can be changed by between -30 degrees (anticlockwise) and 30 degrees (clockwise).
o Change Power: Multi-map. Shows the projected KPIs for a single cell if the power is changed.
Page 213
Use parameters to choose the cell and the power change to model. The azimuth can be
changed by between -10 and +10 dB.
o Change Tilt: Multi-map. Shows the projected KPIs for a single cell if the mechanical tilt is
changed. The tilt can be changed by between -10 degrees (upward) and 10 degrees
(downward).
o Turn Cell Off: Multi-map. Shows the projected KPIs for an area if a selected cell is turned off.
Frequency Reuse
o BCCH Frequency Reuse: Table. Lists GSM cells that have a broadcast control channel conflict
with another cell, and shows details of both cells. Use the Minimum Call Segments Threshold
to define how many conflicts must be seen in a bin in order for it to count as an overlapping
bin.
o BCCH Frequency Reuse: Multi-layer map. Shows the location and extent of different types of
broadcast control channel conflict. Use the Minimum Call Segments Threshold to define how
many conflicts must be seen in a bin in order for it to count as an overlapping bin.
o TCH Frequency Reuse: Multi-layer map. Shows the location and extent of different types of
traffic channel conflict. Use the Minimum Call Segments Threshold to define how many
conflicts must be seen in a bin in order for it to count as an overlapping bin.
o TCH Frequency Reuse: Table. Lists GSM cells that have a traffic channel conflict with another
cell, and shows details of both cells. Use the Minimum Call Segments Threshold to define how
many conflicts must be seen in a bin in order for it to count as an overlapping bin.
Missing Neighbors: Table. Shows information on cells that have been observed performing drops
and Call Re-establishment to other cells.
Note: This analysis requires the GSMMissingNeighbours license.
Performance
The Performance analyses available in the GSM folders are:
Cell KPIs vs Timing Advance
o Cell KPIs vs Timing Advance: Table, Chart. Displays the mean or median RxLev, RxQual, and
pathloss associated with each Timing Advance value for a single cell.
o Cell KPIs vs Timing Advance Map: Multi-layer map. Displays the mean or median RxLev,
RxQual, and pathloss associated with the distance from a single cell.
Data KPIs: Multi-layer map. Shows volumes and throughputs for each bin.
Performance KPIs: Multi-layer map. Shows information such as number of call segments, traffic
density, block rates and drop rates for each bin.
Points
The Points analyses available in the GSM folders are:
Block Locations: Map, Table. Displays the point location of all blocks.
Drop Locations: Map, Table. Displays the point location of all drops.
Locations: Map, Table. Displays the point location of all selected call segments. This analysis
should usually be filtered very specifically and run over a small time period.
Page 214
RF
The RF analyses available in the GSM folders are:
RF KPIs: Multi-layer map. A raster map of the average RxQual, RxLev and power information
recorded in each bin.
Best Server
o Best Server Footprint RF KPIs: Multi-layer map. A raster map with the RxQual and power
recorded for a single cell in all the bins in which it is the best server.
o Best Server RF KPIs: Multi-layer map. A raster map showing the best server in each bin, and the
RxQual and power recorded for it in that bin.
Histograms:
o Call Table RXQUAL Histogram: Table, Chart. The number of times each RxQual value was
detected, on both the downlink and the uplink.
o RXQUAL Histogram: Table, Chart. The number of times the RXQUAL was above and below the
threshold.
o TCH RXLEV Downlink Histogram (Average): Table, Chart. For each range of RxLev values, the
number of bins for which the average TCH downlink RxLev value is within that range.
TCH Statistics
o Cell RF KPIs: Table. Shows KPIs such as average RxLev and Timing Advance for the selected
segments, averaged by cell.
o BTS Power CDF: Table, Chart. The cumulative distribution function (CDF) for the BTS power.
The cumulative distribution function is the probability that the BTS Power value will be lower
than each value shown.
o BTS Power Histogram: Table, Chart. For each range of BTS power values, the number of call
segments for which the BTS power value is within that range.
o BTS Power Trend: Table, Chart. The BTS power at the specified percentile for each time
period. Percentile values run from 0 (the highest power) to 100 (the lowest power). Use
parameters to set the length of each time period and the percentile to show.
o Frame Erasure Rate DL/UL CDF: Table, Chart. The cumulative distribution function (CDF) for
the FER. The cumulative distribution function is the probability that the FER value will be lower
o Frame Erasure Rate DL/UL Histogram: Table, Chart. For each range of FER values, the number
of call segments for which the FER value is within that range.
o Frame Erasure Rate DL/UL Trend: Table, Chart. The FER at the specified percentile for each
time period. Percentile values run from 0 (the lowest FER) to 100 (the highest FER). Use
o MS Power CDF: Table, Chart. The cumulative distribution function (CDF) for the MS power.
The cumulative distribution function is the probability that the MS power value will be lower
o MS Power Histogram: Table, Chart. For each range of MS power values, the number of call
segments for which the MS power value is within that range.
o MS Power Trend: Table, Chart. The MS power at the specified percentile for each time period.
Percentile values run from 0 (the highest MS power) to 100 (the lowest MS power). Use
Page 215
o Pathloss Difference (DL - UL) CDF: Table, Chart. The cumulative distribution function (CDF) for
the pathloss difference. The cumulative distribution function is the probability that the
pathloss difference will be lower than each value shown.
o Pathloss Difference (DL - UL) Histogram: Table, Chart. For each range of pathloss difference
values, the number of call segments for which the pathloss difference is within that range.
o Pathloss Difference (DL - UL) Trend: Table, Chart. The pathloss difference at the specified
percentile for each time period. Percentile values run from 0 (the smallest difference) to 100
(the largest difference). Use parameters to set the length of each time period and the
percentile to show.
o Pathloss DL/UL CDF: Table, Chart. The cumulative distribution function (CDF) for the pathloss.
The cumulative distribution function is the probability that the pathloss value will be lower
o Pathloss DL/UL Histogram: Table, Chart. For each range of pathloss values, the number of call
segments for which the pathloss value is within that range.
o Pathloss DL/UL Trend: Table, Chart. The pathloss value at the specified percentile for each
time period. Percentile values run from 0 (the smallest pathloss) to 100 (the largest pathloss).
Use parameters to set the length of each time period and the percentile to show.
o RxLev DL/UL CDF: Table, Chart. The cumulative distribution function (CDF) for the RxLev. The
cumulative distribution function is the probability that the RxLev value will be lower than each
value shown.
o RxLev DL/UL Histogram: Table, Chart. For each range of RxLev values, the number of call
segments for which the RxLev value is within that range.
o RxLev DL/UL Trend: Table, Chart. The RxLev value at the specified percentile for each time
period. Percentile values run from 0 (the lowest RxLev) to 100 (the highest RxLev). Use
o RxQual DL/UL CDF: Table, Chart. The cumulative distribution function (CDF) for the RxQual.
The cumulative distribution function is the probability that the RxQual value will be lower than
each value shown.
o RxQual DL/UL Histogram: Table, Chart. For each range of RxQual values, the number of call
segments for which the RxQual value is within that range.
o RxQual DL/UL Trend: Table, Chart. The RxQual value at the specified percentile for each time
period. Percentile values run from 0 (the lowest RxQual) to 100 (the highest RxQual). Use
o Timing Advance CDF: Table, Chart. The cumulative distribution function (CDF) for the timing
advance. The cumulative distribution function is the probability that the timing advance value
will be lower than each value shown.
o Timing Advance Histogram: Table, Chart. For each range of timing advance values, the
number of call segments for which the timing advance is within that range.
o Timing Advance Trend: Table, Chart. The timing advance at the specified percentile for each
time period. Percentile values run from 0 (the lowest timing advance) to 100 (the highest
timing advance). Use parameters to set the length of each time period and the percentile to
show.
Note: The TCH Statistics analyses require the GSMOptimization license.
Page 216
Roamers
The Roamer analyses should usually be filtered very specifically and run over a small time period.
The Device and Subscriber analyses available in the GSM folders are:
Roamer Drops: Table. Details of drop numbers and rates for roamers, grouped by their home
network. This analysis can be used to detect any problems with roamers from specific networks.
Roamer Failures by Cell: Table. Which failure reasons were encountered by roamers in each cell,
grouped by home network and cell.
Roamer Failures by Device: Table. Which failure reasons were encountered by roamers using
different devices, grouped by home network and device.
Roamer Summary: Table. Numbers of unique roamers, failures, and RF and data KPIs for the
selected connections, grouped by home network.
Roamer Summary per Cell: Table. Numbers of unique roamers, failures, and RF and data KPIs for
the selected connections, grouped by home network and serving cell.
Subscriber and Cell

The Subscriber and Cell analyses available in the GSM folders are:
BSC Data Performance: Table, Chart. Shows volume and throughput information for the
selected cells, summed or averaged for each BSC.
BSC Performance: Table, Chart. Shows performance KPIs such as blocks and drops for the
selected cells, summed or averaged by BSC.
Cell Data Performance: Table, Chart. Shows volume and throughput information for the
selected cells, summed or averaged for each cell.
Cell Performance: Table, Chart. Shows performance KPIs such as blocks and drops for the
selected cells, summed or averaged by cell.
System Data Performance: Table. Shows volume and throughput information for the selected
cells, summed or averaged across the entire selection.
System Performance: Table, Chart. Shows performance KPIs such as blocks and drops for the
selected cells, summed or averaged across the entire selection.
Top N Calling Subscribers: Table, Chart. The subscribers who made the most calls, and the
number of calls they made.
Top N Devices: Table, Chart. The devices that made the most calls, and the number of calls they
made.
Worst N Cells (Blocks): Table, Chart. The cells with the highest numbers of blocked calls. A more
detailed view of this information, with more filter options, is available from the Call Table folder.
Worst N Cells (Drops): Table, Chart. The cells with the highest numbers of dropped calls. A more
detailed view of this information, with more filter options, is available from the Call Table folder.
Worst N Devices (Drops): Table, Chart. The devices with the highest numbers of dropped calls.
Worst N Subscribers (Blocks): Table, Chart. The subscribers with the highest numbers of blocked
calls.
Worst N Subscribers (Drops): Table, Chart. The subscribers with the highest numbers of dropped
calls.
Page 217
Note: Some of these analyses require the SubscriberManagement license.
Time Series
The Time Series analyses available in the GSM folders are:
BSC Count Against Time (Daily): Table, Chart. Shows performance KPIs such as blocks and drops
for the selected cells, summed or averaged daily by BSC.
BSC Count Against Time (Hourly): Table, Chart. Shows performance KPIs such as blocks and
drops for the selected cells, summed or averaged hourly by BSC.
BSC Count Against Time (Quarter Hourly): Table, Chart. Shows performance KPIs such as blocks
and drops for the selected cells, summed or averaged for each fifteen-minute period by BSC.
Count Against Time (Daily): Table, Chart. Shows performance KPIs such as blocks and drops for
the selected cells, summed or averaged daily across the entire selection.
Count Against Time (Hourly): Table, Chart. Shows performance KPIs such as blocks and drops
for the selected cells, summed or averaged hourly across the entire selection.
Count Against Time (Quarter Hourly): Table, Chart. Shows performance KPIs such as blocks and
drops for the selected cells, summed or averaged for each fifteen-minute period across the entire
selection.
Data Performance Against Time (Daily): Table, Chart. Shows volume and throughput
information for the selected cells, summed or averaged daily across the entire selection.
Data Performance Against Time (Hourly): Table, Chart. Shows volume and throughput
information for the selected cells, summed or averaged hourly across the entire selection.
Data Performance Against Time (Quarter Hourly): Shows volume and throughput information
for the selected cells, summed or averaged for each fifteen-minute period across the entire
selection.
Note: For these analyses, filtering by Geographic Area selects the cells within the selected area
VIP
The VIP analyses should usually be filtered very specifically and run over a short time period.
The VIP analyses available in the GSM folders are:
VIP Block Locations: Table, Map. Displays the point location of all blocks.
VIP Drop Locations: Table, Map. Displays the point location of all drops.
VIP Drop Locations Data: Table, Map. Displays the point location of all data drops.
VIP Drop Locations Speech: Table, Map. Displays the point location of all voice drops.
VIP Locations: Table, Map. Displays the point location of all selected call segments.
VIP Summary: Table. The volume, duration and end reason of all the selected VIP calls.
Note: These analyses require the SubscriberManagement and VIPAnalysis licenses.
Note: The VIP analyses will show the locations of segments that have not been geolocated
confidently enough to show on other analyses. For more information on the confidence filter see
Other Parameters.
Page 218
5.1.3 UMTS Analyses
UMTS analyses are found in the Data Explorer pane, in the Analyses (UMTS) folder. Analyses are
grouped into similar analysis types:
Data Explorer - Analyses (UMTS)
The following table describes the contents of the Data Explorer Analysis folders for UMTS analyses:
system
Busy Hour Analyses identifying the location and seconds of use of the
hour when the most traffic occurred on the system
individual call segments
Calls Analyses showing information such as data volumes for

complete calls, or more detailed information such as
completion codes and data volumes for each individual call
segment
Centroid Analyses displaying the mean location of all selected call

segments.
Data Analyses providing insight into the distribution of data volumes

across cells, devices and subscribers.
Device and Analyses providing information such as Ec/Io and RSCP, drops
Subscriber and blocks, and other KPIs for individual subscribers and device
types.
Failures Analyses showing the reasons for drops and blocks.
Femto Analyses showing information about the performance of femto

cells, or the interactions between femto and macro cells.
Network Tables showing the details of active network cells and neighbor
lists.
Page 219
Optimization Analyses providing insight into the network, such as scrambling
code conflicts, missing neighbors, and the probable effects of
antenna changes.
Performance Information relating to cell performance, such as volume,

throughput, block and drop rates, and how KPIs change with
distance from the cell.
Points Analyses showing the point locations of key events such as

drops, blocks, handovers, and specific call segments.
RF Analyses based on Ec/Io and RSCP, such as best cell and

strongest cell footprints and KPIs, or numbers of polluting cells
in each bin.
Roamers Analyses providing details of the failures and KPIs experienced

by roamers in the network.
Time Series Analyses showing a summary of the change in KPIs for an area,
such as volume and throughput, blocks and drops and so on,
over hours or days.

VIPAnalysis licenses.
on your user role configuration this data may be encrypted or unencrypted.
Administrative
The Administrative analyses available in the UMTS folders are:
Data Availability: Table, Chart. The data availability for each RNC over the selected area and
time.
Femto Loading Summary: Chart. The data that was loaded for Femto cells for each fifteen-
minute time period. The chart summary does not show when loading finished for each period.
Femto Loading Summary: Table. The data that was loaded for Femto cells for each fifteen-
minute time period. The table summary also shows when loading finished for each period.
Loading Errors: Table. The loading errors that occurred for each RNC in each fifteen-minute time
period.
Loading Summary: Table. The data that was loaded for each RNC for each fifteen-minute time
period.
database on each day for each RNC.
Loading Summary GLR Rows: Table, Chart. How many call segments were loaded from
Page 220
Loading Summary GLR Rows Daily: Table. How many call segments were loaded from
Loading Summary GLR Size: Table, Chart. How many MB of data were loaded from geolocater
output files into the database for each fifteen-minute period for each RNC.
Loading Summary Parsed Size: Table, Chart. How many MB of RNC data were parsed during
each fifteen-minute period for each RNC.
Loading Summary Parsed Size Daily: Table. The total number of MB of RNC data parsed on each
day.
period for each RNC.
RNC Summary: Table. The most recent period for which GEOperformance detected data files,
and the most recent period for which files were loaded into the database, for each RNC
Busy Hour
The Busy Hour analyses available in the UMTS folders are:
Busy Hour (Daily RNC): Table. The hour of each day with the greatest average seconds of use for
each selected RNC.
Busy Hour (Daily Server): Table. The hour of each day with the greatest average seconds of use
for each selected cell.
Busy Hour (Daily System): Table. The hour of each day with the greatest average seconds of use
across the filter supplied for the entire GEOperformance area.
Busy Hour (Single RNC): Table. The single hour across all days that has the greatest average
seconds of use for each selected RNC.
Busy Hour (Single Server): Table. The single hour across all days that has the greatest average
seconds of use for each selected cell.
Busy Hour (Single System): Table. The single hour across all days that has the greatest average
seconds of use across the filter supplied for the entire GEOperformance area.
Call Table
The Call Table analyses should usually be filtered very specifically and run over a short time period,
The Call Table analyses available in the UMTS folders are:
Call Table Analyses: Multi-map. A set of map layers showing performance metrics such as block
and drop rates, average Ec/Io and average RSCP for each bin.
Call Table Data KPIs: Multi-map. A set of map layers showing volume and throughput metrics for
each bin.
Count Against Time (Call Table): Table, Chart. The total number of calls that begin within the
selected segments, for each fifteen minute period. For a faster-running summary version of this
analysis, see Time Series.
Page 221
Indoor Outdoor Traffic: Multi-map. The number, data volume, and percentage minutes of use
for indoor and outdoor traffic.
Mobility: Multi-map. The percentage of total calls, minutes of use, drops, and blocks
corresponding to different mobility classifications (stationary, pedestrian, vehicular).
Performance KPIs by Service: Table. Shows information such as number of calls, traffic density,
block rates and drop rates for each service.
Worst N Cells (Blocks) (Call Table): Table, Chart. The cells with the highest numbers of blocked
Worst N Cells (Drops) (Call Table): Table, Chart. The cells with the highest numbers of dropped
Calls
The Calls analyses available in the UMTS folders are:
Call Count: Table, Chart. Shows, for each service type, the number of blocks, drops, and calls
started on that service. Some services may show blocks and drops but no calls. This indicates
that no calls started on that service, but that some calls then changed onto that service.
Calls Summary: Table. Displays, for each call, the total uplink and downlink volumes, summed
across all the segments in that call.
Individual Call Segments: Table. Displays detailed information such as completion codes and
data volumes for each individual call segment. This analysis should usually be filtered very
specifically and run over a short time period.
Note: The Calls Summary and Individual Call Segments analyses require the Subscriber license.
Centroid
The Centroid analyses should usually be filtered very specifically and run over a small time period.
The Centroid analyses available in the UMTS folders are:
Centroid of multiple locations: Map, Table. Displays the central point of all the selected
segments, also called the mean position.
Weighted centroid of multiple locations: Map, Table. Displays the central point of all the
selected segments. Each segment is weighted by the confidence of its geolocated position.
Data
The Data analyses should usually be filtered very specifically and run over a short time period.
The Data analyses available in the UMTS folders are:
Top N Cell Volume: Table. Shows volume, RSCP and EcIo information for the cells experiencing
the highest data volume over the selected call segments. Use the Number of values parameter to
choose how many cells to return. By default, 10 will be shown.
Top N Device Volume: Table. Shows volume, RSCP and EcIo information for the device types
experiencing the highest data volume over the selected call segments. Use the Number of values
parameter to choose how many devices to return. By default, 10 will be shown.
Top Subscribers Volume: Table. Shows volume, RSCP and EcIo information for the subscribers
Page 222
using the highest data volume over the selected call segments. Use the Number of values
parameter to choose how many subscribers to return. By default, 10 will be shown.
Note: The Top Subscribers Volume analysis requires the SubscriberManagement license.

Note: The Device and Subscriber analyses depend on list summarization. If a specific device or
subscriber is not available in the filter, this may indicate that list summarization has not occurred
recently.
The Device and Subscriber analyses under the UMTS folders are:
Performance Against Time: Table, Chart. RF performance and KPIs summed or averaged for
each fifteen-minute period for every single device specified.
Device
Device Capability
o Device Data Volume by Service: Table. Provides volume and throughput information for each
device, broken down by service.
o Devices by Cell & DL HS Category: Table, Chart. For each cell, shows the number of calls
started in that cell by devices of each HS category.
o Devices by Cell & UL HS Category: Table, Chart. For each cell, shows the number of calls
started in that cell by devices of each HS category.
o Performance KPIs per Device DL HS Category: Table, Chart. Lists RF performance and KPIs
summed or averaged for each UL HS category.
o Performance KPIs per Device UL HS Category: Table, Chart. Lists RF performance and KPIs
summed or averaged for each UL HS category.
o Performance KPIs Table per Device DL HS Category By Cell: Table, Chart. Lists RF
performance and KPIs summed or averaged for each combination of DL HS category and cell.
o Performance KPIs Table per Device UL HS Category By Cell: Table, Chart. Lists RF
performance and KPIs summed or averaged for each combination of UL HS category and cell.
Device Comparison
o Device Comparison: Table. RF performance and KPIs summed or averaged for each individual
device.
o Device Comparison By Cell: Table. RF performance and KPIs summed or averaged for each cell
for the selected individual devices.
o Device List Comparison: RF performance and KPIs summed or averaged by the list each device
belongs to. Device lists are normally set up to correspond to manufacturers, in which case this
analysis will show KPIs summed or averaged by manufacturer.
o Device List Comparison By Cell: RF performance and KPIs summed or averaged for each cell
for the list each device belongs to.
o Top N Devices by Subscriber count: Table. Lists RF performance and KPIs summed or
averaged for the types of the device that are used by the largest number of individual
subscribers within the filter.
Device Time Series
o Device Comparison trend over time: Table. RF performance and KPIs summed or averaged for
Page 223
each fifteen-minute time period for the selected individual devices. This shows slightly more
information than the Performance Over Time analysis.
o Device List Comparison trend over time: Table. RF performance and KPIs summed or
averaged for each fifteen-minute time period for the list the devices belong to.
Unique
o Unique Device Counts: Table. Information about each type of mobile device in the network,
such as how many unique devices are in use, the services they are using, and the drops and
blocks they are experiencing.
o Unique Device Maps: Map. The number of each type of mobile device in each bin, whether
they used voice or data RABs, and how many devices experienced drops and blocks.
o Unique Devices: Table. The number of each type of mobile device in each bin, the number
using voice or data RABs, and the number that experienced drops and blocks.
o Unique Devices Hourly Trend: Table, Chart. A summary of the number of unique devices
present in the selected segments during each hour of the selected time period.
Device IFHO KPIs: Table. Lists all inter-frequency handover attempts and outcomes in the
selection, grouped by device.
Device Performance Summary Per Individual: Table. RF performance and KPIs for every single
device of the type or types specified in the filter. Arieso recommends that you set several
optional filters to limit the data returned.
Device Report Summary: Table. Shows a small number of key metrics, such as the number of
unique devices, for every model of device.
Devices Count by RNC: Table. For each device, shows the associated TAC and the number of
unique IMEIs of that TAC on each selected RNC.
Note: These analyses require the DeviceManagement license.
Subscriber
Subscriber Comparison
o Subscriber Comparison: Table. RF performance and KPIs summed or averaged for each
individual subscriber.
o Subscriber Comparison By Cell: Table. RF performance and KPIs summed or averaged for each
cell for the selected individual subscribers.
o Subscriber List Comparison: RF performance and KPIs summed or averaged by the list each
subscriber belongs to. For example, if subscribers were listed by state or province, this analysis
would show KPIs summed or averaged by state or province.
o Subscriber List Comparison By Cell: RF performance and KPIs summed or averaged for each
cell for the list each subscriber belongs to.
Subscriber Time Series
o Subscriber Comparison trend over time: Table. RF performance and KPIs summed or
averaged for each fifteen-minute time period for the selected individual subscribers.
o Subscriber List Comparison trend over time: Table. RF performance and KPIs summed or
averaged for each fifteen-minute time period for the list the subscribers belong to.
Unique Subscribers
o Unique Subscriber Count: Multi-layer map. The number of unique subscribers (based on IMSI)
Page 224
in each bin. As well as the total number of users, shows the number of unique users
experiencing blocks or drops, or using data or voice connections.
o Unique Subscriber Count: Table. The number of unique subscribers (based on IMSI) in each
bin. As well as the total number of users, shows the number of unique users experiencing
blocks or drops, or using data or voice connections.
o Unique Subscriber Count by Cell: Table. The number of unique subscribers (based on IMSI) in
each cell. Also shows the number of unique users experiencing blocks or drops, or using data or
voice connections in each cell.
Subscriber IFHO KPIs: Table. Lists inter-frequency handover attempts and outcomes for the
selected subscribers. To see detailed information on selected inter-frequency handovers,
including the associated subscribers, use the IFHO Locations analysis in the Points folder.
Subscriber Performance Summary Per Individual: Table. RF performance and KPIs for every
single device of the type or types specified in the filter.
Note: These analyses require the SubscriberManagement license.
Failures
The Failures analyses should usually be filtered very specifically and run over a small time period,
The Failures analyses available in the UMTS folders are:
Combined Failure Reasons: Table, Chart. The number of calls that terminated with each
combined completion code, and the category (block, drop and so on) that code is assigned to.
Failure Reasons: Table, Chart. The number of calls that terminated with each combined
completion code, and the category (block, drop and so on) that code is assigned to.
Failure Reasons by Cell: Table. For each cell, the number of calls that terminated with each
combined completion code, and the number of failures for each domain within each completion
code.
Failure Reasons by RNC: Table. For each RNC, the number of calls that terminated with each
combined completion code, and the number of failures for each domain within each completion
code.
IFHO Failure Reasons: Table, Chart. The number of inter-frequency handoffs that terminated
with each combined completion code, and the category (block, drop and so on) that code is
assigned to.
Multilayer Failure Reasons: Table. The number of occurrences of each failure reason, counted
across both Macro and Femto cells (if available).
RANAP Failure Reasons: Table, Chart. The number of calls that terminated with each RANAP
completion code. Completion codes are only shown if at least one call terminated with that
code.
RRC Failure Reasons: Table, Chart. The number of calls that terminated with each RRC
completion code.
Vendor Specific Failure Reasons: Table, Chart. The number of calls that terminated with each
vendor specific completion code.
Page 225
Femto
The Femto analyses available in the UMTS folders are:
Cell Data Performance: Multi-map. Throughputs, volumes and dropped packets in each bin for
the selected cell group.
Cell Data Performance: Table. Throughputs, volumes and dropped packets in each bin for each
cell in the selected group.
Cell Load: Table. The UE, call and paging load for each cell in the selected group.
Cell Voice Performance: Table. Metrics such as voice MoU and RAB attempts for each cell in the
selected group.
Handover Failure Reasons: Table. The number of times each handover failure was seen in the
selected cell group.
Handover Failure Reasons By Cell: Table. The number of times each handover failure was seen
in each cell in the selected group.
Handover Performance Femto: Table. The hand-in and hand-out performance for both PS and
CS connections within the Femto layer for each cell in the selected group.
Handover Performance Femto and Macro: Table. The hand-in and hand-out performance
between the Macro layer and the Femto layer for each cell in the selected group.
RAB Performance KPIs: The number of RAB setup attempts and successes for the selected cell
group, broken down by RAB.
RRC Performance KPIs: The number of RRC setup attempts and successes for each cell in the
selected group.
RRC Setup SR by Cause: The RRC setup success rate for each RRC setup cause within the selected
cell group.
System Performance Against Time: RRC and RAB setup success information for each time
period, summed across the selected cells. Use the Time grouping parameter to select the length
of the time periods shown, from 1 hour to 1 day.
Worst N Cell Groups (RAB Setup): RAB setup success information for each of the cell groups with
the greatest overall number of RAB setup failures. Use the Number of values parameter to
choose how many cell groups to return. By default, the worst 20 will be shown.
Worst N Cell Groups (RRC Setup): RRC setup success information for each of the cell groups with
the greatest overall number of RRC setup failures. Use the Number of values parameter to
choose how many cell groups to return. By default, the worst 20 will be shown.
Worst N Cells (RAB Drops): RAB setup success information for each of the cells with the greatest
number of RAB drops. Use the Number of values parameter to choose how many cells to return.
By default, the worst 20 will be shown.
Worst N Cells (RAB Setup): RAB setup success information for each of the cells with the greatest
number of RAB setup failures. Use the Number of values parameter to choose how many cells to
return. By default, the worst 20 will be shown.
Worst N Cells (RRC Setup): RRC setup success information for each of the cells with the greatest
number of RRC setup failures. Use the Number of values parameter to choose how many cells to
return. By default, the worst 20 will be shown.
Page 226
Note: These analyses require the FemtoCellsUMTS license.
Network
The Network analyses available in the UMTS folders are:
Active Network Cells: Table. Details such as latitude/longitude, ARFCN, scrambling code, azimuth
and so on for all selected cells.
On Air UMTS to GSM Neighbors List: Table. Lists UMTS cells that have a GSM neighbor, and
On Air UMTS to UMTS Neighbors List: Table. Lists UMTS cells that have a UMTS neighbor, and
Special Cell Transmitter: Table. Provides details of the antennas used by special antenna systems
such as DAS, Micro(indoor) or repeaters.
Optimization
The Optimization analyses in the UMTS folders are:
Antenna Tuning
(downward).
Scrambling Code
Note: These analyses require the ScramblingCodeTuning license. For more information on Scrambling
Code analyses see Scrambling Code Tuning.
o Neighbor and Code Relationships: Table. Displays, for each cell selected, all the cells in its
neighbor list and in the lists of its neighbors, down to tier 4.
o Scrambling Code Choices Ranked By Score: Table. Lists the possible scrambling codes that
could be used for the selected cell or cells, ranked according to the level of conflict with
existing scrambling codes.
o Scrambling Code Conflicts: Table. Lists scrambling code conflicts between cells, ranked
according to the level of conflict with existing scrambling codes.
o Scrambling Code Suggestions (Advanced): Table. Displays the best scrambling code to use for
the selected cell or cells (up to 9), based on conflict with existing scrambling codes. If multiple
cells are selected, the analysis ensures that its selections do not conflict.
o Scrambling Code Suggestions (Basic): Table. Displays the best scrambling code to use for the
selected cell or cells, based on conflict with existing scrambling codes. This analyses does not
ensure that its selections do not conflict.
Page 227
Missing Neighbors: Table. Shows cells that have entered the reporting range within the selected
cell or cells (that is, an E1A event occurred) but that have not been added to the active set.
Note: This analysis requires the MissingNeighbor license.
X Feeder: Table. Identifies sites whose cells may have had their feeder cables crossed. Shows all
the cells analyzed, along with any difference between their recorded azimuth and what
GEOperformance estimates their actual azimuth to be. Note that a result of Partial Match
indicates that the cell's azimuth does not match its recorded azimuth, but that there is no
evidence of crossed feeders.
The X Feeder analysis uses call data to determine cell azimuth, so it should usually be restricted to
a small geographic area and run over a short time period, such as one or two days.
Note: This analysis requires the UMTSOptimization license.
Performance
The Performance analyses available in the UMTS folders are:
Cell Data Performance
Note: These analyses require the UMTSDataOptimization license.
o Cell DL Data Throughput: Table, Chart. Displays a table or chart showing data throughput
performance for specific cells.
o Cell DL Data Throughput Histogram: Table, Chart. Displays a table or chart showing the
combined number of call segments in each throughput band for the selected cells. The lowest
throughput band is set using the Segment Average Throughput Threshold parameter. Very
short data downloads can be excluded from analysis using the Minimum Data Percentage
Threshold.
o Cell UL Data Throughput: Table, Chart. Displays a table or chart showing data throughput
performance for specific cells.
o Cell UL Data Throughput Histogram: Table, Chart. Displays a table or chart showing the
combined number of call segments in each throughput band for the selected cells.
Cell KPIs vs Distance
o Cell Performance KPIs vs Distance: Table, Chart. Shows how the KPIs for a single cell are
affected by distance from the cell. The distance bands are set by the Binned Distance
parameter.
o Cell Performance KPIs vs Distance Map: Multi-map. Shows how the KPIs for a single cell are
affected by distance from the cell.
IFHO
o Cell Performance IFHO KPIs: Table. Lists all inter-frequency handover attempts and outcomes
in the selection, grouped by start cell.
o IFHO Counts and Rates by Carrier: Table. Lists all inter-frequency handover attempts and
outcomes in the selection, grouped by ARFCN.
o IFHO Counts and Rates by Cell: Table. Lists all inter-frequency handover attempts and
outcomes in the selection, grouped by cell.
Data KPIs: Multi-map. Shows volumes and throughputs for each bin.
Multilayer Data Summary: Table. A summary of performance metrics such as uplink and
Page 228
downlink throughput and volume for each service group.
Network Performance Score: Map. Shows the general health of the network in each bin, as a
single score based on Ec/Io, RSCP, and pilot pollution. Use the parameters to change the
weighting given to each component, and how close to the strongest server's Ec/Io a cell's Ec/Io
must be for it to be considered a polluter.
Performance KPIs: Multi-map. Shows information such as number of call segments, traffic
density, block rates and drop rates for each bin.
Points
The Points analyses should usually be filtered very specifically and run over a short time period,
especially the Locations analysis.
The Points analyses available in the UMTS folders are:
Block Locations: Map, Table. Displays the point location of all blocks. When this is shown as a
map analysis, the block locations are color coded according to whether they are circuit-switched,
packet-switched or signalling blocks.
Drop Locations: Map, Table. Displays the point location of all drops. When this is shown as a
map analysis, the block locations are color coded according to whether they are circuit-switched,
packet-switched or signalling drops.
IRAT Locations: Map, Table. Displays the point location of all inter-RAT handovers.
Locations: Map, Table. Displays the point location of every call segment.
Successful IFHO Locations: Map, Table. Displays the point location of all successful inter-
frequency handovers.
Unsuccessful IFHO Locations: Map, Table. Displays the point location of all successful inter-
frequency handovers.
Once a Points analysis has run, you may be able to right-click on it to show information about the
items associated with the largest numbers of points. For more information, see Ranking Points in a
Points Analysis.
Roamers
The Roamers analyses should usually be filtered very specifically and run over a short time period.
The Roamers analyses available in the UMTS folders are:
Roamer Drops: Table. Details of drop numbers and rates for roamers, grouped by their home
network. This analysis can be used to detect any problems with roamers from specific networks.
Roamer Failures by Cell: Table. The number of each failure reason (both drops and blocks)
encountered by roamers in each cell serving the selected call segments.
Roamer Failures by Device: Table. The number of each failure reason (both drops and blocks)
encountered by roamers on each device used for the selected call segments.
Roamer Registration Failures: Table. Details of registration failures for roamers, grouped by
their home network.
Roamer Summary: Table. Details of number of roamers, failures, and RF KPIs for the selected
connections, grouped by home network.
Roamer Summary per Cell: Details of number of roamers, failures, and RF KPIs for the selected
Page 229
connections, grouped by home network and serving cell.
RF
The RF analyses available in the UMTS folders are:
Best Server
o Best Server Footprint RF KPIs: Multi-map. Shows the best Ec/Io and RSCP recorded for the
selected cell in all the bins in which it is the best server.
o Best Server RF KPIs: Multi-map. Shows the mean Ec/Io and RSCP of the best server in each bin.
o Cell Footprint (Best): Map. Shows the number of call segments where the selected cell (or
cells) is the best server.
o Ec/Io Histogram (Best): Table, Chart. the number of times the selected cell is the best server in
a bin with each Ec/Io value.
Footprints
o Footprint Diagnostics: Table. Displays information about the area in which a cell is the best
server, compared to its total footprint.
o RF Footprint KPIs: Multi-map. Displays the average Ec/Io and RSCP for the selected cells
across all call segments included in the filter.
o RF Processed Footprint RSCP: Map. Displays the average processed RSCP for the selected cells
across all call segments included in the filter. The processed RSCP is adjusted to reflect the
underreporting of low values, and extrapolates the RSCP for bins where only the Ec/Io is
reported.
IFHO
o IFHO KPIs Trend: Table, Chart. Displays the number of successful and unsuccessful inter-
frequency handovers in each hour-long period. Change the Time grouping parameter to see
the handovers broken down by fifteen minute or 24 hour period instead.
Propagation Delay
o Propagation Delay by Cell: Table, Chart. Shows the distribution of propagation delay values
for each cell.
Statistics
o RF CDF: Table, Chart. Shows the probability that the selected KPI will have a value better than
that shown in the key. Use the Name of the CDF to create parameter to select the KPI.
o RF Histograms: Table, Chart. Shows the distribution of values for the selected KPI. Use the
Name of the histogram to create parameter to select the KPI.
o RF KPIs at Percentiles: Multi-map. Shows the value of the Ec/Io and RSCP at the selected
percentile for each bin. The percentile scale runs from 0 (the best KPI values) to 100 (the
worst). Use the Percentile value to display parameter to set the percentile to view.
o RF Overview: Table, Chart. Shows the value of the selected percentile for the selected KPI for
each cell. The percentile scale runs from 100 (the best KPI values) to 0 (the worst). Use the
Percentile value to display parameter to set the percentile to view, and the Name of the
overview to create parameter to select the KPI.
o RF Percentiles Per Threshold: Multi-map. Shows the proportion of values in each bin that are
better than the set Ec/Io, RSCP and UE Tx power thresholds. Use the parameters to set
thresholds for each value.
Page 230
o RF Scatter: Table, Chart. Shows every combination of values of the selected KPIs that appear
the selected call segments, and the number of call segments that contain that pair of values.
This analysis can be used to analyze relationships and dependencies between separate KPIs.
Use the 1st Parameter and 2nd Parameter parameters to select the pair of KPIs to analyze.
o RF Trend: Table, Chart. The value of the selected KPI at the selected percentile for each
fifteen-minute period. The percentile scale runs from 100 (the best KPI values) to 0 (the worst).
Use the Percentile value to display parameter to set the percentile to view, and the Name of
the overview to create parameter to select the KPI.
Strongest Server
o Cell Footprint (Strongest): Map. Shows the number of call segments where the selected cell
(or cells) is the strongest server.
o Strongest Server Footprint RF KPIs: Multi-map. Displays the best Ec/Io and RSCP recorded for
the selected cell in all the bins in which it is the strongest server.
o Strongest Server RF KPIs: Multi-map. The mean Ec/Io and RSCP of the strongest server in each
bin.
Trends
o RF Trend on Average Value by Sector: Table. Shows the average Ec/Io and RSCP values for
each cell in each hour period, across all the call segments included in the filter. Use the
Averaging Method parameter to choose between linear and logarithmic averaging.
Best Server: Map. The best serving cell in each bin.
Pilot Pollution NdB: Map. The number of servers that have a median Ec/Io within a configurable
number of dB of the best server's Ec/Io in each bin. All cells other than the best server are
considered polluters.
Pilot Pollution Top Polluters: Table, Chart. The top ten cells responsible for pilot pollution within
the filter area. The best three servers in each bin are not included in this number.
Processed RSCP: Map. The RSCP for each bin. The processed RSCP is adjusted to reflect the
underreporting of low values, and extrapolates the RSCP for bins where only the Ec/Io is
reported.
Ranked Server Stack: Multi-map. Shows the energy, footprint, RSCP and Ec/Io of the six best
serving cells in each bin. The energy is calculated by converting all the Ec/Io values reported for
the bin into linear values, and summing them for each cell.
RF KPIs: Multi-map. Displays the average Ec/Io, RSCP, and UE transmit power. Use the Averaging
Method parameters for each metric to select whether to view a linear average (in which the
logarithmic dB values are converted to linear values before averaging) or a logarithmic average (in
which the dB values are averaged without any conversion).
UE TxPower per Sector: Table. The UE TxPower distribution for each cell. This is the number of
times each UE Tx Power was encountered within the selected call segments.
Subscriber and Cell

The Subscriber and Cell analyses available in the UMTS folders are:
Cell Links Data Summary: Table, Chart. Shows throughput and volume information for individual
cells.
Cell Performance: Table, Chart. Shows KPIs such as drops and blocks, as well as data volume and
throughput, for individual cells.
Page 231
Daily Block Rate by RNC: Table, Chart. Displays the block rate for each day for each RNC.
Daily Block and Drop Rate: Table, Chart. Displays the drop and block rate per day for each RNC.
Daily Drop Rate by RNC: Table, Chart. Displays the drop rate for each day for each RNC.
Multilayer Cell Links Data Summary: Table. A summary of performance metrics such as uplink
and downlink throughput and volume for each cell.
System Performance: Table. Displays performance information such as number of connections,
block rate and drop rate, summed across the entire system for the selected time period.
Top N Calling Subscribers: Table, Chart. Displays the subscribers who made the most calls, and
the number of calls they made. Use the Number of values parameter to set the number of
subscribers to show.
Worst N Cells (Blocks): Table, Chart. Displays the cells with the highest numbers of blocked calls.
Variants of this analysis show the cells with the highest number of specifically circuit-switched or
packet-switched blocks. Use the Number of values parameter to set the number of cells to show.
A more detailed view of this information, with more filter options, is available from the Call Table
folder.
Worst N Cells (Drops): Table, Chart. Displays the cells with the highest numbers of dropped calls.
Variants of this analysis show the cells with the highest number of specifically circuit-switched or
packet-switched drops. Use the Number of values parameter to set the number of cells to show.
A more detailed view of this information, with more filter options, is available from the Call Table
folder.
Worst N Subscribers (Blocks): Table, Chart. Displays the subscribers suffering the highest
numbers of blocked calls. Use the Number of values parameter to set the number of subscribers
to show.
Worst N Subscribers (Drops): Table, Chart. Displays the subscribers suffering the highest
numbers of dropped calls. Use the Number of values parameter to set the number of subscribers
to show.
on your user role configuration this data may be encrypted.
Time Series
The Time Series analyses available in the UMTS folders are:
Area Data Performance Against Time: Table, Chart. Shows summarized throughput and volume
information (uplink and downlink) for each hour for the selected area.
Cell Data Performance Against Time: Table, Chart. Shows summarized throughput and volume
information (uplink and downlink) for each hour for the cells in the selected area.
Count Against Time: Table, Chart. Shows the total number of calls in the selected area during
each fifteen minute period. A more detailed view of this information, including calls with a low
confidence, is available from the Call Table folder.
Count By Day: Table, Chart. Shows the total number of calls in the selected area during each day
period (00:00:00 to 23:59:59).
Drops Against Time: Table, Chart. Shows the total number of drops in the selected area during
each fifteen minute period.
Multilayer Cell Data Performance Against Time: Table, Chart. A summary of performance
Page 232
metrics such as LS and HSPA+ throughput and volume across the selected cells during each hour
period.
RNC Count Against Time: Table, Chart. Shows the total number of calls in the selected area
during each 15 minute period, broken down by RNC.
RNC Count Against Time (Pivot): Table, Chart. Shows the total number of calls in the selected
area during each 15 minute period, broken down by RNC. When displayed as a chart, this shows
the number of calls on each RNC against the time period.
System Performance Against Time: Table, Chart. Shows summarized KPIs such as the block and
drop rate during each fifteen minute period.
VIP
TheVIP analyses should usually be filtered very specifically and run over a short time period. This is
especially true for the VIP Locations analysis, which unlike other analyses does not filter its results
by the confidence of their geolocation and so can return a very large amount of data.
The VIP analyses available in the UMTS folders are:
VIP Block Locations: Map, Table. Displays the point location of all blocks that occurred on the
selected VIP calls. In addition, the table view shows information such as segment completion
codes and services.
VIP Drop Locations: Map, Table. Displays the point location of all drops that occurred on the
selected VIP calls. In addition, the table view shows information such as segment completion
codes and services.
VIP Drop Locations Data: Map, Table. Displays the point location of all drops that occurred on
any of the selected VIP calls that were packet switched.
VIP Drop Locations Voice: Map, Table. Displays the point location of all drops that occurred on
any of the selected VIP calls that were circuit switched.
VIP IFHO Locations: Map, Table. Displays the point location of all inter-frequency handovers.
VIP Locations: Map, Table. Displays the point location of all the selected VIP call segments. In
addition, the table view shows information such as segment completion codes and services.
VIP Summary: Table. Displays a summary of the volume and duration of all the selected VIP
calls.
5.1.4 LTE Analyses

LTE analyses are found in the Data Explorer pane, in the Analyses (LTE) folder. Analyses are grouped
into similar analysis types:
Page 233
Data Explorer - Analyses (LTE)
The following table describes the contents of the Data Explorer Analysis folders for LTE analyses:
system.
individual call segments.
Connections Analyses showing detailed connection information such as

throughputs, CQIs and end reasons for individual connections,
individual connection segments, or sessions.
Data Analyses showing information about data volumes,

throughputs, durations and latencies for specific times or
locations.
KPIs Analyses showing connection statistics such as numbers of

requests, rejects, eRAB attempts, failures, and handovers, broken
down by cell, device, eNodeB and so on.
Optimization Analyses providing insight into the network, such as the

probable effects of antenna changes.
Performance Information relating to cell performance, such as traffic

volume.
Point Analyses showing the point locations of key events such as S1

and X2 handovers and specific connection segments.
Reasons Analyses showing the number of occurrences of each start

reason, release command reason, handover reason and so on.
RF Analyses showing information on CQI, RSRP, RSRQ and SINR

values, broken down by cell, device, eNodeB and so on.
Usage Analyses showing information about data volumes,

throughputs, durations and latencies, broken down by cell,
Page 234
device, eNodeB and so on.

VIPAnalysis licenses.
VoLTE Analyses showing information about Voice over LTE.
Administrative
The Administrative analyses available in the LTE folders are:
eNodeB Group Summary: Table. The most recent period for which GEOperformance detected
data files, and the most recent period for which files were loaded into the database, for each
eNodeB group
Loading Errors: Table. The loading errors that occurred for each eNodeB group in each fifteen-
minute time period.
Loading Summary: Table. The data that was loaded for each eNodeB group for each fifteen-
minute time period.
database on each day for each eNodeB group.
Loading Summary LGLR Rows: Table, Chart. How many call segments were loaded from
Loading Summary LGLR Rows Daily: Table. How many call segments were loaded from
Loading Summary LGLR Size: Table, Chart. How many MB of data were loaded from geolocater
output files into the database for each fifteen-minute period for each eNodeB group.
Loading Summary Parsed Size: Table, Chart. How many MB of eNodeB group data were parsed
during each fifteen-minute period for each eNodeB group.
Loading Summary Parsed Size Daily: Table. The total number of MB of eNodeB group data
parsed on each day.
period for each eNodeB group.
Call Table
The Call Table analyses available in the LTE folders are:
Call Table Data KPIs: Multi-layer map. Displays data volumes, durations, throughputs, latencies
and delays. For a faster-running summary version of this analysis, see Data KPIs.
Call Table Dominance: Map. Shows the number of polluting cells in each bin. Use the
Dominance Delta (dB) parameter to choose how close a cell's RSRP must be to the best cell's
RSRP for it to be considered a polluter. Use Cells Ranking Method to change how the best cell is
determined, and the RSRP Averaging Method to choose between linear or logarithmic averaging.
For a faster-running summary version of this analysis, see RF.
Page 235
Call Table Nth Best Cell RF KPIs: Multi-layer map. Displays raster maps showing information
about the RSRP, RSRQ and CQI of the Nth best cell in each bin. Use the Nth Best Cell To Show
parameter to choose the cell whose KPIs are to be displayed. For a faster-running summary
version of this analysis, see RF.
Call Table Performance KPIs: Multi-layer map. A set of raster maps displaying traffic volumes,
blocks and drops. For a faster-running summary version of this analysis, see Performance KPIs
(shows Traffic Volume (MOU) Only)
Indoor Outdoor Traffic: Multi-layer map. The number, data volume, and percentage minutes of
use for indoor and outdoor traffic.
Connections
The Connections analyses available in the LTE folders are:
Connections: Table. Displays a summary of information such as throughputs and CQI values for
each selected connection.
Individual Connection Segments: Table. Displays details such as start and end reasons, data
throughput, and volume, for every selected connection segment.
Individual ERAB Segments: Table. Displays details of every selected ERAB segment.
Note: The Individual ERAB Segments analysis requires the DeviceManagement and
SubscriberManagement licenses.
Session Bearers: Table. Displays details such as latency and bit rates for each bearer/eRAB set up
during connections.
Sessions: Table. Displays details of each session of data transfer observed during connections.
Data
The Connections analyses available in the LTE Analysis folders are:
Data Against Time: Table, Chart. Displays data volumes and throughputs for each 15-minute
period.
Data KPIs: Multi-layer map. A set of raster maps displaying data volumes, durations, throughputs,
latencies and delays. A more detailed view of this information, with more filter options, is
available from the Call Table folder.
Data KPIs per Bin Table: Table. The downlink volume and throughput for each bin associated
with the selected connection segments.
Downlink Data Throughput CDF: Table, Chart. Shows the cumulative distribution function (CDF)
for the downlink data throughput. The cumulative distribution function is the probability that the
downlink data throughput will have a value lower than that shown.
Downlink Data Throughput Histogram: Table, Chart. Shows, for each range of data throughput
values, the number of bins for which the data throughput value is within that range. The data
throughput value for a bin is the average of the selected segments that fall within that bin.
Downlink Data Volume CDF: Table, Chart. Shows the cumulative distribution function (CDF) for
the downlink data volume. The cumulative distribution function is the probability that the
downlink data volume will have a value lower than that shown.
Downlink Data Volume Histogram: Table, Chart. Shows, for each range of data volume values,
Page 236
the number of bins for which the data volume is within that range. The data volume value for a
bin is the average of the selected segments that fall within that bin.
Mobility: Multi-layer map. A set of raster maps showing the percentage of total calls, minutes of
use, and blocks corresponding to different mobility classifications (stationary, pedestrian and
vehicular).
KPIs
The KPIs analyses available in the LTE Analysis folders are:
Connection KPIs: Table, Chart. Displays connection statistics such as numbers of requests,
rejects, eRAB attempts, failures, handovers and so on.
Connection KPIs by Cell: Table, Chart. Displays connection statistics such as numbers of
requests, rejects, eRAB attempts, failures, handovers and so on, for each cell that a selected call
segment is assigned to.
Connection KPIs by Device: Table, Chart. Displays connection statistics such as numbers of
requests, rejects, eRAB attempts, failures, handovers and so on, for each device that a selected
call segment is assigned to.
Connection KPIs by Downlink Channel Number: Table, Chart. Displays connection statistics
such as numbers of requests, rejects, eRAB attempts, failures, handovers and so on, for each
Downlink Channel Number that a selected call segment is assigned to.
Connection KPIs by eNodeB: Table, Chart. Displays connection statistics such as numbers of
requests, rejects, eRAB attempts, failures, handovers and so on, for each eNodeB that a selected
call segment is assigned to.
Connection KPIs by Frequency Band: Table, Chart. Displays connection statistics such as
numbers of requests, rejects, eRAB attempts, failures, handovers and so on, for each Frequency
Band that a selected call segment is assigned to.
Connection KPIs by Subscriber: Table, Chart. Displays connection statistics such as numbers of
requests, rejects, eRAB attempts, failures, handovers and so on, for each subscriber that a
selected call segment is associated with.
Connection KPIs by Tracking Area Code: Table, Chart. Displays connection statistics such as
numbers of requests, rejects, eRAB attempts, failures, handovers and so on, for each Tracking
Area Code that a selected call segment is assigned to.
Network
The Network analysis available in the LTE folders is:
Active Network Cells: Table. Details such as latitude/longitude, ARFCN, PCI, azimuth and so on
for all selected cells.
Optimization
The Optimization analyses available in the LTE folders are:
Antenna Tuning
Page 237
(downward).
Performance
The Performance analyses available in the LTE Analysis folders are:
Neighbor Performance Per Cell: Table, Chart. Shows handover performance between the
selected cells and the cells to which they performed handovers (or from which they received
handovers). This analysis should usually be filtered very specifically and run over a small time
period.
Performance KPIs: Map. Displays a raster map of the traffic volume (MOU). A more detailed
view of this information, with block and drop information and more filter options, is available
from the Call Table folder.
Points
The Points analyses available in the LTE Analysis folders are:
Block Locations: Multi-layer map, Table. Displays the point location of all blocks within the
selected connection segments.
Count of Drops by Reason: Table. Displays the number of drops recorded for each UE context
release reason.
Count of Drops by Reason and Cell: Table. Displays the number of drops recorded for each UE
context release reason in the selected segments, broken down by cell.
Count of Drops by Reason and TAC: Table. Displays the number of drops recorded for each UE
context release reason in the selected segments, broken down by Tracking Area Code (TAC).
CS Fallback Locations Count: Table. Displays the number of CS fallbacks in the selected
segments.
CS Fallback Locations Count by Accuracy: Table. Displays the number of CS fallbacks in the
selected segments, broken down by geolocation confidence.
CS Fallback Locations Count by Accuracy and Cell: Table. Displays the number of CSS fallbacks
in the selected segments, broken down by cell and then geolocation confidence.
CS Fallback Locations Count by Cell: Table. Displays the number of CSS fallbacks recorded in the
selected segments, broken down by cell.
CS Fallback Locations Count by TAC: Table. Displays the number of CSS fallbacks recorded in the
selected segments, broken down by Tracking Area Code (TAC).
Drop Locations: Multi-layer map, Table. Displays the point location of all drops within the
selected connection segments.
IRAT Handovers by Target Technology: Multi-layer map, Table. Shows the location of each
handover attempt from or to UMTS or GSM.
Locations: Multi-layer map, Table. Displays the point location of all selected connection
Page 238
segments.
Locations with Release Command Reasons: Multi-layer map, Table. Displays the point location
of all of the selected connection segments that have an associated UE context release command
reason. By default, the points are colored according to the type of release reason.
Locations with Release Reasons: Multi-layer map, Table. Displays the point location of all of the
selected connection segments that have an associated UE context release request reason. By
default, the points are colored according to the type of release reason.
Multi ERAB End: Map, Table. Shows the points at which the number of ERABS used by a
connection reduces to fewer than 2.
Multi ERAB Start: Map, Table. Shows the points at which the number of ERABS used by a
connection increases to more than 1.
Note: The Multi ERAB analyses require the DeviceManagement and SubscriberManagement
licenses.
S1 Handover Locations: Multi-layer map, Table. Displays the point location of all S1 handovers in
the selected segments.
X2 Handover Locations: Multi-layer map, Table. Displays the point location of all X2 handovers
in the selected segments.
Once a Points analysis has run, you may be able to right-click on it to show information about the
items associated with the largest numbers of points. For more information, see Ranking Points in a
Points Analysis.
Reasons
The Reasons analyses available in the LTE Analysis folders are:
ERAB Release Command Reasons: Table, Chart. Shows the number of times each ERAB release
command reason was encountered in the selected segments.
RRC Release Reasons: Table, Chart. Shows the number of times each RRC release command
reason was encountered in the selected segments.
S1 Handover Preparation Reasons: Table, Chart. Shows the number of times each S1 handover
preparation reason was encountered in the selected segments.
Start Reasons: Table, Chart. Shows the number of times each connection establishment reason
was encountered in the selected segments.
UE Context Release Command Reasons: Table, Chart. Shows the number of times each UE
context release command reason was encountered in the selected segments.
UE Context Release Reasons: Table, Chart. Shows the number of times each UE context release
reason was encountered in the selected segments.
RF
The RF analyses available in the LTE Analysis folders are:
CQI
o CQI: Table, Chart. Displays the number of times each CQI value (0-15) is detected in the
selected segments.
o CQI by Cell: Table, Chart. Displays the median CQI and the number of measurements of each
CQI value in the selected call segments, broken down by cell.
Page 239
o CQI by Device: Table, Chart. Displays the median CQI and the number of measurements of
each CQI value in the selected call segments, broken down by device type (TAC).
o CQI by Downlink Channel Number: Table, Chart. Displays the median CQI and the number of
measurements of each CQI value in the selected call segments, broken down by downlink
channel number.
o CQI by eNodeB: Table, Chart. Displays the median CQI and the number of measurements of
each CQI value in the selected call segments, broken down by eNodeB.
o CQI by Frequency Band: Table, Chart. Displays the median CQI and the number of
measurements of each CQI value in the selected call segments, broken down by frequency
band.
o CQI by IMEI: Table, Chart. Displays the median CQI and the number of measurements of each
CQI value in the selected call segments, broken down by IMEI.
o CQI by Subscriber: Table, Chart. Displays the median CQI and the number of measurements of
each CQI value in the selected call segments, broken down by subscriber.
o CQI by Tracking Area Code: Table, Chart. Displays the median CQI and the number of
measurements of each CQI value in the selected call segments, broken down by tracking area
code (TAC).
o CQI Statistics: Multi-layer map. Displays the mean and median CQI in each bin, as well as the
number of measurements on which the calculations are based.
Measurements
o Measurements: Table, Chart. Displays the average RSRP and RSRQ for the selected call
segments.
o Measurements by Cell: Table, Chart. Displays the average RSRP and RSRQ for the selected call
segments, broken down by cell.
o Measurements by Device: Table, Chart. Displays the average RSRP and RSRQ for the selected
call segments, broken down by device type (TAC).
o Measurements by Downlink Channel Number: Table, Chart. Displays the average RSRP and
RSRQ for the selected call segments, broken down by downlink channel number.
o Measurements by eNodeB: Table, Chart. Displays the average RSRP and RSRQ for the selected
call segments, broken down by eNodeB.
o Measurements by Frequency Band: Table, Chart. Displays the average RSRP and RSRQ for the
selected call segments, broken down by frequency band.
o Measurements by IMEI: Table, Chart. Displays the average RSRP and RSRQ for the selected
call segments, broken down by IMEI.
o Measurements by Subscriber: Table, Chart. Displays the average RSRP and RSRQ for the
selected call segments, broken down by Subscriber.
o Measurements by Tracking Area Code: Table, Chart. Displays the average RSRP and RSRQ
for the selected call segments, broken down by tracking area code (TAC).
SINR
o PUCCH
PUCCH SINR: Table, Chart. Shows the median and distribution of Signal to Interference plus
Noise Ratio (SINR) values on the Physical Uplink Control Channel, aggregated across the
Page 240
selected segments.
PUCCH SINR by Cell: Table, Chart. For each cell in the selection, this analysis shows the
median and distribution of Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR) values on the
Physical Uplink Control Channel.
PUCCH SINR by Device: Table, Chart. For each device in the selection, this analysis shows
the median and distribution of Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR) values on the
PUCCH SINR by Downlink Channel Number: Table, Chart. For each downlink channel in the
selection, this analysis shows the median and distribution of Signal to Interference plus Noise
Ratio (SINR) values on the Physical Uplink Control Channel.
PUCCH SINR by eNodeB: Table, Chart. For each eNodeB in the selection, this analysis shows
the median and distribution of Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR) values on the
PUCCH SINR by Frequency Band: Table, Chart. For each frequency band in the selection,
this analysis shows the median and distribution of Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio
(SINR) values on the Physical Uplink Control Channel.
PUCCH SINR by IMEI: Table, Chart. For each IMEI in the selection, this analysis shows the
median and distribution of Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR) values on the
PUCCH SINR by Subscriber: Table, Chart. For each subscriber in the selection, this analysis
shows the median and distribution of Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR) values on
the Physical Uplink Control Channel.
PUCCH SINR by Tracking Area Code: Table, Chart. For each TAC in the selection, this
analysis shows the median and distribution of Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR)
values on the Physical Uplink Control Channel.
PUCCH Uplink SINR: Multi-layer map. Shows the mean and median SINR values on the
Physical Uplink Control Channel recorded in each bin. The PUCCH Uplink SINR Measurement
Volume layer provides an indication of the data reliability by displaying the number of
measurements made within each bin.
o PUSCH
PUSCH SINR: Table, Chart. Shows the median and distribution of SINR values on the Physical
Uplink Shared Channel, aggregated across the selected segments.
PUSCH SINR by Cell: Table, Chart. For each cell in the selection, this analysis shows the
median and distribution of SINR values on the Physical Uplink Shared Channel.
PUSCH SINR by Device: Table, Chart. For each device in the selection, this analysis shows
the median and distribution of SINR values on the Physical Uplink Shared Channel.
Page 241
PUSCH SINR by Downlink Channel Number: Table, Chart. For each downlink channel in the
selection, this analysis shows the median and distribution of SINR values on the Physical
Uplink Shared Channel.
PUSCH SINR by eNodeB: Table, Chart. For each eNodeB in the selection, this analysis shows
the median and distribution of SINR values on the Physical Uplink Shared Channel.
PUSCH SINR by Frequency Band: Table, Chart. For each frequency band in the selection,
this analysis shows the median and distribution of SINR values on the Physical Uplink Shared
Channel.
PUSCH SINR by IMEI: Table, Chart. For each IMEI in the selection, this analysis shows the
median and distribution of SINR values on the Physical Uplink Shared Channel.
PUSCH SINR by Subscriber: Table, Chart. For each subscriber in the selection, this analysis
shows the median and distribution of SINR values on the Physical Uplink Shared Channel.
PUSCH SINR by Tracking Area Code: Table, Chart. For each TAC in the selection, this
analysis shows the median and distribution of SINR values on the Physical Uplink Shared
Channel.
PUSCH Uplink SINR: Multi-layer map. Shows the mean and median SINR values on the
Physical Uplink Shared Channel recorded in each bin. The PUCCH Uplink SINR Measurement
Volume layer provides an indication of the data reliability by displaying the number of
measurements made within each bin.
Timing Advance
o Timing Advance: Multi-layer map. Shows the mean and median timing advances recorded in
each bin for the selected call segments. The Timing Advance Measurement Volume layer
provides an indication of the data reliability by displaying the number of measurements made
within each bin.
Transmission Mode
o Downlink MIMO Usage by Connection (%): Map. Shows the percentage of the selected
segments in each bin that use MIMO (Rank 2 with Transmission Modes 3, 4 or 8).
Accuracy of Best Server Summary: Table. Shows information on the geolocation confidence
associated with the bins in which each cell is the best server.
Best Cell Footprint RF KPIs: Multi-layer map. Displays raster maps of the selected cell's
footprints, showing CQI details and the best RSRQ and RSRP recorded for the selected cell in all
the bins in which it is the best server.
Best Cell RF KPIs: Multi-layer map. Displays raster maps showing information about the best cell
and number of polluting servers in each bin.
Best Cell RF KPIs by Mean RSRP: Multi-layer map. Displays raster maps showing information
about the best cell and number of polluting servers in each bin. For this analysis, unlike other Best
Cell analyses, the best server is calculated based on which cell has the best mean RSRP (not
weighted by the number of times it is seen) in each bin.
Binned Mean Dominance CDF: Table, Chart. Shows the cumulative distribution function (CDF)
for the total number of polluting servers within the specified number of dB of the best server,
Page 242
across all the bins in the filter.
Binned Mean Dominance Histogram: Table, Chart. Shows the total number of polluting servers
within the specified number of dB of the best server, across all the bins in the filter.
Note: For the above Dominance analyses, the number of polluting servers in each bin is, by default,
the number of servers seen in that bin that have an RSRP within the pollution threshold of the best
server's RSRP. Use the dB difference to be polluting parameter to change the pollution threshold
Binned Mean RSRP CDF: Table, Chart. Shows the cumulative distribution function (CDF) for
RSRP.
Binned Mean RSRP Histogram: Table, Chart. Shows the number of bins with a mean RSRP within
each range shown.
Binned Mean RSRQ CDF: Table, Chart. Shows the cumulative distribution function (CDF) for
RSRQ.
Binned Mean RSRQ Histogram: Table, Chart. Shows the number of bins with a mean RSRQ within
each range shown.
Coverage Area of Best Cell: Table. Shows the area for which each cell in the selection is the best
cell.
Dominance: Map. Shows the number of polluting cells in each bin. Use the Dominance Delta
(dB) parameter to choose how close a cell's RSRP must be to the best cell's RSRP for it to be
considered a polluter. Use Cells Ranking Method to change how the best cell is determined, and
the RSRP Averaging Method to choose between linear or logarithmic averaging. A more detailed
view of this information, with more filter options, is available from the Call Table folder.
KPIs of Best Cell Per Bin Table: Table. Shows the RSRP, RSRQ and dominance of each best cell
included in the selected connection segments, within every bin in which it is the best cell.
Nth Best Cell RF KPIs: Multi-layer map. Displays raster maps showing information about the
RSRP, RSRQ and CQI of the Nth best cell in each bin. Use the Nth Best Cell To Show parameter
to choose the cell whose KPIs are to be displayed. A more detailed view of this information, with
more filter options, is available from the Call Table folder.
RF Health Index: Table, Chart. For each cell in the selection, this analysis shows an overview of
its areas of coverage, good signal strength and quality, and pilot pollution. This analysis can be
tailored to your own definitions of pilot pollution and good RSRP/RSRQ using the following
parameters:
o dB difference to be polluting: the threshold difference between the cell's RSRP and the 5th
best server's (or other selected rank) in the bin. This cell will be classed as a polluter in any
bin in which this cell is not the best cell and has an RSRP difference less than this amount.
The default is 5dB
o Rank of server to check for pilot pollution: the server from which the dB difference
threshold will be calculated. The best server is rank 1. The default is rank 5
o Good RSRP threshold in dBm: in bins where the mean RSRP for this cell is greater than this
threshold, the RSRP for this cell will be classed as good. The default is -110
o Good RSRQ threshold in dBm: in bins where the mean RSRQ for this cell is greater than this
threshold, the RSRQ for this cell will be classed as good. The default is -10
Page 243
Subscriber and Cell
The Subscriber and Cell analyses available in the LTE Analysis folders are:
Unique Subscribers: Map. Shows a raster map of the number of unique subscribers in each bin.
Worst N Cells (Blocks): Table, Chart. Shows the cells with the highest total number of blocks
over the selected connections, as well as the corresponding block rate. Use the Choose the
number of values to return parameter to change the number of cells viewed. By default the worst
25 cells are shown.
Worst N Cells (Drops): Table, Chart. Shows the cells with the highest total number of drops over
the selected connections, as well as the corresponding drop rate. Use the Choose the number of
values to return parameter to change the number of cells viewed. By default the worst 25 cells
are shown.
Worst N Cells (High Latency): Table, Chart. Shows the cells with the highest average downlink
latency over the selected connections, as well as the number of samples this is based on. Use
the Choose the number of values to return parameter to change the number of cells viewed. By
default the worst 25 cells are shown.
Worst N Cells (Low Throughput): Table, Chart. Shows the cells with the lowest average
throughput over the selected connections, as well as the volume and duration. Use the Choose
the number of values to return parameter to change the number of cells viewed. By default the
worst 25 cells are shown.
Worst N Subscribers (Blocks): Table, Chart. Shows the subscribers with the highest total number
of blocks over the selected connections, as well as the corresponding block rate. Use the Choose
the number of values to return parameter to change the number of subscribers viewed. By
default the worst 25 subscribers are shown.
Worst N Subscribers (Drops): Table, Chart. Shows the subscribers with the highest total number
of drops over the selected connections, as well as the corresponding drop rate. Use the Choose
the number of values to return parameter to change the number of subscribers viewed. By
default the worst 25 subscribers are shown.
Worst N Subscribers (High Latency): Table, Chart. Shows the subscribers with the highest
average latency over the selected connections, as well as the number of samples this is based on.
Use the Choose the number of values to return parameter to change the number of subscribers
viewed. By default the worst 25 subscribers are shown.
Worst N Subscribers (Low Throughput): Table, Chart. Shows the subscribers with the lowest
average throughput over the selected connections, as well as the volume and duration. Use the
Choose the number of values to return parameter to change the number of subscribers viewed.
By default the worst 25 subscribers are shown.
Note: The Subscriber analyses require the SubscriberManagement license.
Usage
The Usage analyses available in the LTE Analysis folders are:
Usage: Table, Chart. Displays data durations, volumes, throughputs and delays, summed or
averaged across the selected segments.
Usage by Cell: Table, Chart. Displays data durations, volumes, throughputs and delays, summed
Page 244
or averaged across the selected segments, broken down by cell.
Usage by Device: Table, Chart. Displays data durations, volumes, throughputs and delays,
summed or averaged across the selected segments, broken down by device type (TAC).
Usage by Downlink Channel Number: Table, Chart. Displays data durations, volumes,
throughputs and delays, summed or averaged across the selected segments, broken down by
downlink channel number.
Usage by eNodeB: Table, Chart. Displays data durations, volumes, throughputs and delays,
summed or averaged across the selected segments, broken down by eNodeB.
Usage by Frequency Band: Table, Chart. Displays data durations, volumes, throughputs and
delays, summed or averaged across the selected segments, broken down by frequency band.
Usage by IMEI: Table, Chart. Displays data durations, volumes, throughputs and delays, summed
or averaged across the selected segments, broken down by IMEI.
Usage by Mean Number of Concurrent Users: Map. The average number of active users in each
bin. By default, the number of active call IDs is sampled once per second. These samples are
then averaged. To change the time between sampling, use the Sampling period (seconds)
parameter.
Usage by Mean Number of Concurrent Users/km2: Map. The average density of active users
for each bin, defined as concurrent users per square kilometer for ease of integration with
external systems that use this metric.
Usage by QCI: Table, Chart. Displays data durations, volumes, throughputs and delays, summed
or averaged across the selected segments, broken down by QCI.
Usage by Subscriber: Table, Chart. Displays data durations, volumes, throughputs and delays,
summed or averaged across the selected segments, broken down by subscriber.
Usage by Tracking Area Code: Table, Chart. Displays data durations, volumes, throughputs and
delays, summed or averaged across the selected segments, broken down by tracking area code
(TAC).
Volume (MOU): A raster map showing the minutes of use for each bin, totalled from the selected
segments that fall within that bin.
VoLTE
The VoLTE analyses available in the LTE Analysis folders are:
VoLTE Block Locations: Multi-layer map, Table. Displays the point location of all blocks within
the selected VoLTE connection segments.
VoLTE Drop Locations: Multi-layer map, Table. Displays the point location of all drops within the
selected VoLTE connection segments.
VoLTE Locations: Multi-layer map, Table. Displays the point location of all selected VoLTE
connection segments.
Note: Do not set a CQI filter on the above analyses, or they will not work correctly.
VoLTE Traffic (mErlangs): Map. Shows the total VoLTE traffic intensity in each bin over the
selected time period. VoLTE traffic is defined as segments that have a QCI of 1.
VoLTE Traffic (mErlangs/km2): Map. Shows the VoLTE traffic density in each bin, defined as
mErlangs per square kilometer for ease of integration with external systems that use this metric.
Page 245
VoLTE Traffic Volume (MOU): Map. Shows the total VoLTE traffic in each bin over the selected
time period.
VIP
The VIP analyses available in the LTE folders are:
VIP Locations: Map, Table. Displays the point location of all the selected VIP call segments. In
addition, the table view shows information such as start reasons and mobility classifications.
VIP Summary: Table. Displays a summary of the volume and duration of all the selected VIP
calls.
5.1.5 WiFi Analyses

WiFi analyses are found in the Data Explorer pane, in the Analyses (WiFi) folder.
The analyses available in the WiFi folders are:
Network
o Active WiFi Access Points: Table. Details such as latitude/longitude, Mac address, floor of
building and so on for all selected cells
Aggregated WiFi KPIs Against Time: Table, Chart. A summary of performance metrics such as
uplink and downlink throughput and volume for each time period, summed across the selected
connections. Use the Time grouping parameter to set whether the KPIs should be summarized
over each 15 minutes, each hour, or each day.
Data Usage Per Client Authentication Method: Table. Shows the total volume and packet
numbers for each client interface.
Data Usage Per Device Manufacturer: Table. Shows the total volume and packet numbers for
devices from each manufacturer.
Demand Per Access Point: Table. Shows information about the number of number of users and
devices using each access point, and their data usage.
Device Usage Per IMSI: Table. Shows information about the number of number of devices using
each access point, and their data usage, broken down by IMSI
RF KPIs Per Access Point: Table. Shows information about the RSSI and SNR of each access
point.
WiFi KPIs Against Time: Table, Chart. A summary of performance metrics such as uplink and
downlink throughput and volume for each time period, summed across the selected WiFi access
points. Use the Time grouping parameter to set whether the KPIs should be summarized over
each 15 minutes, each hour, or each day
WiFi KPIs By Access Point: Table. A summary of performance metrics such as uplink and
downlink throughput and volume for each WiFi access point over the selected time period
WiFi Sessions: Table. Shows information about usage and performance metrics for individual
sessions.
Worst N WiFi Access Points By SNR: Table. Shows the access points with the worst average SNR,
and a summary of their RF KPIs and usage.
Page 246
5.2 Filters
Filters let you specify the exact data to include in your analysis. Only data that meets all the
selected criteria will be included. So for example, you could run an Individual Call Segments analysis
that specifies a geographic location, a time and a service. Only call segments that occurred in that
area, at that time, on that service would be shown.
Note: If no filter is set for an analysis, GEOperformance defaults to the document filter. If no filter is
set for a document, it defaults to the time period, geographic area and geolocation confidence level
set in File > Options.
Some analyses must have certain filters set. When one of these analyses is dragged onto the
canvas, it will prompt you to set those filters. You can add filters to other analyses by clicking the
triangular filter icon.
ariesoGEO filter dialog
Note: Not all filters are valid for all analyses. When setting filters for an analysis, only the filters
available for that analysis are shown.
Filters are divided into four groups: Common, GSM, LTE and UMTS. Common filters can be used
with all analyses. The others can only be used with analyses belonging to the relevant technology.
For more detailed information on filters, see the Technical Guide.
Filters for specific features
Some optional modules may provide extra filters for associated analyses. These additional filters
are described here:
Advanced Diagnostics Module filters
Page 247
5.2.1 Common Filters
The following table describes the Common filters available from the Filter Editor:
Time Period The time period for which the analysis will retrieve call data.
You can set specific hours within this time period using Day
Hour Settings. For example, to look at data during standard
working hours for three days you would set the Time Period to
three days and the Day Hour Settings to 0900-1700.
Some analyses show summarized data for fifteen-minute
periods. These analyses will include all the fifteen-minute
periods required to cover the Time Period set.
Geographic Area The area for which the analysis will retrieve data. You can set
this using the map bounds, by setting latitude and longitude, or
by drawing a polygon around the required area.
Exactly how the geographic area filter works depends on the
analysis:
For point analyses such as Block Locations, the filter will
include every point within the filtered area.
For cell-based analyses such as the UMTS Call Count analysis,
the filter will include all calls served by cells within the
filtered area.
For bin-based analyses such as the UMTS Best Server
analysis, a bin will be included in the analysis if its center is
within the geographical boundary.
Day Hour Settings The days or hours within the specified Time Period for which
the analysis will retrieve data. You can also filter by busy
hours.
Cell The cell on which a call started.

For dropped call analyses, this is instead the cell on which the
call ended.
Country Subscriber country of origin.
Device Device type, make and model. This filter uses a device list
configured by an administrator to look up the TAC code or
codes corresponding to the device.
Device Software Device software version.

Version (SV)
GEO Area The database partition into which the data is being loaded.
This is only used in Common Administrative (that is, data
loading) analyses.
ID The call ID. This is used to find all segments belonging to a

specific call.
IMEI The International Mobile Equipment Identity.

Page 248
Mobility The subscriber's speed during each call segment. Mobility is
classed as stationary, pedestrian, or vehicular depending on
speed.
Roamer Whether the subscriber is roaming or on their home network

during the call.
Service Group The service group the specific service used for the call belongs
to, such as Voice, HS Data or Multi-RAB.
Subscriber The IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) of the

subscriber making the call.
Subscriber Home The home network of the subscriber making the call.
Network
TAC The Type Allocation Code. This is similar to searching by

Device, but enables you to specify the exact TAC to filter calls
by rather than using the configured mapping of Device to one
or more TACs.
Technology The technology used for the call (GSM, UMTS or LTE)
VIP The VIP list the subscriber making the call belongs to. This filter
uses a VIP list configured by an administrator to look up specific
subscribers or groups of subscribers. For example, you could
analyze calls made by a specific set of corporate clients.
Note: Some of these filters use licensed functionality and will only be available if the relevant license
is installed.
Page 249
5.2.2 GSM Specific Filters
The following table describes the GSM-Specific filters available from the Filter Editor:
ARFCN The carrier for the channel used by the call. If an ARFCN filter
is not set, the analysis will combine carrier layers.
BSC The BSC of the serving cell for the call.
Cell Band A specific cell/frequency band combination. This is stated in

the form Cell Label (Frequency Band), for example 501C (GSM
900).
Channel The logical channel type of the call segment, such as BCH or
HSCSD.
End Category The termination category (such as Continuation, Block or

Normal) assigned to a call segment, based on its message code.
End Reason The more detailed termination category (such as Drop (Bad
Quality) or Continuation (Handover)) assigned to a call
segment, based on its message code.
Frequency Band The frequency band used by the call.
Segment Start The start category assigned to a call segment (such as

Category InterCellHandover or Vamos), based on its Segment Start
Reason
Segment Start The start reason message for each segment, such as
Reason E_AssignmentToBetterCell or H_ECV_NORM_A_BETTER_CELL.
Service The service type, such as Voice, Signalling or Multi-RAB.
5.2.3 UMTS Specific Filters

The following table describes the UMTS specific filters accessible from the Filter Editor:
ARFCN The Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number, also known as
the carrier.
If an ARFCN filter is not set, some analyses may be misleading.
For example, Best Server analyses may combine carrier layers.
Cell Type The type of the cell. For example, Macro, Femto, DAS and so
on.
Completion Code The most detailed completion code of those available for the
(Combined) call segment.
Note that the combined completion code filter does not

include all the call segments with a specific RRC or RANAP
completion code. This filter includes only the call segments
Page 250
where a) the completion code is the one specified and b) there
is not a more informative completion code available (such as a
vendor-specific code).
If in doubt, use one of the specific completion code filters

below instead.
Completion Code The vendor-specific completion code for the call segment. The
(Vendor) nature of this code depends on the vendor. For example, NSN
completion codes are based on Megamon/EMIL PMI ticket
messages, whereas Ericsson completion codes are based on
GPEH Internal System Block and Internal System Release
messages.
Non-terminal call segments are assigned a completion code of
Contination.
Completion Code The RANAP Iu Release Command completion code for the call
(RANAP) segment.
Contination.
Completion Code The RRC Connection Release completion code for the call
(RRC) segment.
Contination.
Establishment The establishment cause for the call segment.

Later call segments in an existing call are assigned an
Establishment of Contination.
Network View The termination category (such as Continuation, Block or

(Combined) Normal Release) assigned to a call segment, based on its
combined completion code (see above).

(RANAP) Normal Release) assigned to a call segment, based on its
RANAP completion code.

(RRC) Normal Release) assigned to a call segment, based on its RRC
completion code.

(Vendor) Normal Release) assigned to a call segment, based on its
vendor-specific completion code.
RNC The RNC serving the cell that is best server for the call segment.
Scrambling Code The Primary Scrambling Code of the cell.

Note: In the Scrambling Code Suggestions analyses, this filter
restricts the list of recommended scrambling codes, rather than
Page 251
the cells considered.
Service The specific RAB, such as Voice & HS or Cell FACH.

Services are combined into categories by the Common filter
Service Group.
UE Capabilities One or more specific capabilities of the UE making the call,

such as support of compressed mode, GSM, or Multi-carrier
operation.
UE Downlink The HSDPA category of the UE making the call.

Category
UE Power Class The power class of the UE making the call.
UE Release The 3GPP version of the UE making the call, such as R99 or
Indicator Rel11.
UE Uplink The HSUPA category of the UE making the call.

Category
5.2.4 LTE Specific Filters

The following table describes the LTE filters accessible from the Filter Editor:
ARFCN The carrier frequency (EARFCN) used by the session.
End Category The termination category (such as Continuation, Drop or

Normal) assigned to a call segment, based on its message code.
eNodeB The eNodeB serving the call segment.
Establishment The reason for the start of the call segment, such as Call
Establishment, Incoming Handover or Inter-RAT Cell
Reselection.
Frequency Band The frequency band used by the call.
Physical Cell ID The physical Cell ID.
QCI The Quality of Service Class Identifier.
Segment End The termination category assigned to a segment, such as

Reason Completion or RabChange.
Segment Start The start reason message for a segment, such as Start or
Reason RabChange.
Start Outcome The result of the attempt to setup a connection, such as Block
or Success.
Tracking Area The code that identifies the tracking area of the mobile during
Code the call segment.
Page 252
6 Data Import
The great majority of GEOperformance users will rarely (if ever) need to import network or call
related data manually. Indeed, the GEOperformance architecture considers a centralized manual
(via Administrator users) or automatic/scheduled (near or post real-time) data loading mechanism.
Undoubtedly, this approach simplifies the day-to-day life of the typical GEOperformance user,
who therefore only needs to connect to the GEOperformance database to get the data that will
help them analyze/optimize the cells and area of interest.
This section describes mechanism for loading lists for filtering and polygons.
6.1 List Management

List Name Management allows the administrator and users to create named Lists of Filter values.
Users can use these Lists in Filters with Analyses.
The Lists are stored in the GEOperformance database. This gives three main advantages:
1. The administrator can set up Lists once, available for all users to use.
2. Lists can be used to Filter through a database join, user is not limited to the 50 items for filter
values to generate database queries.
3. There is a performance benefit of storing and referencing the Lists in the GEOperformance
database – the user just needs to reference a List, rather than all the individual values.
Each List is associated with a Filter type – so there can be lists of Subscribers, Devices, Services, etc.
Each List has an Owner (the user that created the List). The administrator is a special user and can
see and manage everybody’s Lists. Other users can choose to make their lists public (so all other
users can see and user them) or private (so only they can see and use them).
If the list refers to Sensitive Personal Information (IMEI/IMEI) then you may manage lists in
encrypted or unencrypted format depending on your user role assignment.
6.1.1 List Name Management Window

The List Name Management window allows users to import new Lists,view rename and delete
existing Lists and export Lists.
To launch the List Name Management window click on the Manage List Names button on the Home
ribbon:
Page 253
ariesoGEO List Name dialog - UMTS filter types shown, GSM filter types may vary
The 3 columns on the left:

Filter Types column shows the available Filter types that it is possible to create/view Lists for.
These are all the Filter types visible in the Filter Editor except those where the limited number of
values removes the value of Lists.
List Owners column shows the users who have saved Lists of the Filter type selected. All is
selected by default.
List Names column shows the list names that the selected users have made public, or those list
names that belong to the current user and are private. The checkbox next to the List name
indicates if it is public (checked) or private (unchecked).
When one or more List names are selected their values are displayed in the 2 columns on the right,
showing the value and the name of the list it belongs to.
Note: Display is limited to 1000 values.
6.1.2 Importing New Lists

To import a new list, click on the Import button on the List Name Management window. The Import
List Names window appears allowing the user to:
Choose the Filter Type
Choose Filter to Import and Select Data
Start the Import
Page 254
Choose the Filter Type
Lists are associated with a Filter type, the Filter Type page allows this to be chosen:
Import List Names window Filter Type page - UMTS filter types shown, GSM filter types may vary.
This is pre-set with the currently selected Filter type in the List Name Management window.
Note: Only administrators may import the following lists used in the GEOperformance Filter Editor
interface:
TACs - Type Allocation Codes
Country – Country names
Operators – Different operators
VIP
Choose the File to Import and Columns of Data

Lists are imported from CSV (Comma Separated Values) files. The CSV files are expected to have a
one line header row, containing a header for each column.
Choose the CSV file by clicking on the browse (‘…’) button.
Choose the appropriate delimiter (Comma, Semicolon or Tab)
Once a CSV file has been selected, a preview of the first 20 items in the file appears in the preview
section, allowing visibility of the headers and some of the data, to aid choice of the correct
columns.
First it is necessary to choose the column containing the values. In this simple example there is a list
of subscriber IMEI values along with a class they belong to (Gold, Silver or Bronze), so the Subscriber
column is chosen from the drop-down.
Page 255
Selecting values during list import
The column chosen is now colored orange in the data preview to help confirm the correct column.
The Class column will be used to generate the List Names, so in the Create list names from the
contents in columns group, open the green combo box and choose the Class column header.
This will then generate list names from the contents of that column. In this simple example 3 list
names will be generated – Bronze, Gold and Silver. A prefix or postfix string can be added to these
by entering a string in the Prefix and Postfix text boxes. In this example ‘ Subscribers’ is entered in
the postfix text box. Hover the mouse cursor over the Preview link to show what the first few
entries would be like if the prefix, column value and postfix were put together:
Selecting names during list import
Once a column has been chosen, the Data Preview section is updated and the column colored in
green, to help confirm which columns were chosen.
Data Preview with Selected Values and Names
Additional columns may be chosen to make List Names at the same time by clicking on the Add New
Page 256
button to add a new list name generation entry.
Rather than choosing a column to generate the List name, a List name can be entered that will be
used for all the values in the CSV file. Finally, the list names may be made public or private by
checking (or unchecking) the Make Public checkbox.
Starting the Import

Once the columns to be imported have been reviewed and are correct, click on the Start Import tab
on the left, then on the Start Import button to start the import process.
Once it has finished it reports on how many Lists were imported. Closing this window and going
back to the main window the imported List names may be seen.
6.1.3 Editing Lists

Updating Lists
It is not possible to change (add, remove, edit) the values in an existing List.
To update a List it is necessary to re-import from a CSV file. If this is done, the current List in the
database is totally replaced by the imported List: there is no merging or appending, all values are
cleared and the new List imported.
List names must be unique per Filter type. I.e. there can be only one list called ‘Gold Subscribers’ for
the Subscriber filter type. If there is already a List named ‘Gold Subscribers’ then its contents will be
replaced by the List being imported (assuming the user importing it has permission to do this).
If the user does not have permission (e.g. someone else owns the List named ‘Gold Subscribers’)
then the import for that List name will not take place and a different List name must be chosen.
Deleting Lists
To delete a List the user must be the owner (or administrator). Select the List name(s) it is desired
to delete and simply press the Delete key on the keyboard, or right-click and choose Delete from the
pop-up menu.
Renaming Lists
A List may be renamed only by its owner. Select the List name it is desired to rename and either
press the F2 key on the keyboard, right-click and choose Rename from the pop-up menu, or click the
mouse cursor on the selected List name and the name may be edited in-line.
Once editing is finished, press Enter on the keyboard or click outside the edit box, and the new name
will be saved. Press Escape on the keyboard to cancel the renaming process.
6.1.4 Exporting Lists

One or more List names to CSV files may be exported:
1. Select the List name(s) to be exported.
2. Press the Export button.
3. Choose a CSV filepath to save to, when prompted.
It then saves the values of the selected list names to the CSV file, one value per row, in two columns
– ‘List Name’ and ‘Value’. E.g.:
Page 257
List export format
6.2 Polygon Import

The Polygon Import wizard allows a user to create GEOperformance polygons from polygon files
(such as from MapInfo ). These polygons can then be used to define the Geographical Area in
Filters when running Analyses.
Click on the Import Polygons button on the Home ribbon to launch the wizard.
6.2.1 Select the File to Import

Click the Browse button to select a file (a MapInfo .TAB file), or type the file path into the edit box,
or drag and drop a file from a Windows Explorer window onto the page.
Once the file has been selected, it will be opened and analysed and a summary of the number of
polygon groups and individual polygons is displayed.
In MapInfo, a polygon can actually consist of several individual polygons. For example a collection
of individual islands can be grouped together and considered to be 1 polygon in MapInfo (a polygon
group). In GEOperformance, each polygon must be an individual polygon.
6.2.2 Select the Polygons to Import

Choose which polygons are to be imported and how they should be named.
Page 258
Polygon Import Wizard - Select Polygons to Import
A table is presented, each row representing an individual polygon that will be created. The columns
in the table are:
Selected if checked will import the polygon. Press the Select All and Unselect All buttons to select/
unselect all the polygons in one go.
Polygon Filename is the filename that will be given to this imported polygon (see below).
# Polygons is the number of polygons in this polygon group.
# Vertices is the number of vertices in this polygon.
# Vertices (Simplified) is the number of vertices in the simplified version of the polygon (see
below)
Other fields that are listed in the MapInfo table data will vary depending on the MapInfo file that
you import.
Polygon Filenames
One MapInfo file can generate many individual polygon files so a way of naming the generated files
must be chosen so they have unique names.
A field from the incoming MapInfo table data may be used. Depending on how the MapInfo file was
generated polygons often have unique names in one or more fields. Choose a field from the drop-
down list of available fields. If a polygon is a member of a polygon group (i.e. ‘# Polygons’ > 1), the
second and subsequent polygons will have a numbered suffix to differentiate them.
Alternatively a prefix may be chosen that will be used for all the polygons. Again, subsequent
polygons will have a numbered suffix to differentiate them (e.g. poly, poly_1, poly_2).
Simplifying the Polygons
The polygons to be imported may be very complex. When used in a filter, complex polygons can
greatly increase calculation time. A facility to simplify the polygons is available using the Douglas-
Peucker algorithm to find a similar polygon with fewer points. The simplified polygon consists of a
subset of the points that defined the original polygon.
The degree of simplification may be changed by changing the Kink Value. Put simply, if a line
contains a kink in it of that value or less, the point is removed: the greater this value (in metres) the
simpler the polygon becomes. The following images show the effect of different kink values:
Original
Simplification with kink value of 500m
Page 259
To simplify the polygons, check the Simplify the Polygons checkbox and click the Update button.
6.2.3 Choose the Folder to Save the Polygons

There may be several Polygon files generated therefore a folder must be chosen in which to save
the generated polygons. Either a Data Explorer folder or a folder on the users computer’s file
system may be chosen.
Once the polygons have been generated a success message is displayed.
Open the folder (in Data Explorer or Windows Explorer) and drag the polygons to a map control or
the Filter Editor to see and use them.
Page 260
7 Glossary
Bin A 50m * 50m geographic area. Many analyses show information summarized
by bin, rather than for individual calls or segments. Bins are also sometimes
called pixels, because this is how they appear on raster analyses.
Block A failure that occurs during call establishment.
Call Spider An optional tool that can be used on a selected call segment in a points map
analysis. It shows further details of the call segment, including a visual
indication of its distance from the measured cells.
Confidence How confident GEOperformance is that the call is correctly located, based on
the consistency between the different details used in the geolocation. Values
below 0.001 are low confidence.
Control An item that can be added to the presentation canvas. Some controls, such as
maps, charts and tables, determine the format of the analysis dragged onto
them. Others, such as the legend or textbox, can be used to add extra
information to a display of analyses. For more information, see Control
Toolbox.
Data Explorer A pane in the GEOperformance user interface, showing a folder structure from
which analyses, filters and color themes can be dragged onto the canvas, or
onto analyses on the canvas. For more information, see Data Explorer.
Document A saved presentation canvas. For more information, see GEOperformance
Document Types.
Drop A failure that occurs on an established call. Note that drops are assigned to the
cell and service on which they occur, but calls are assigned to the originating
cell and service.
Event Events may be shown on map analyses, in the Advanced Diagnostics Module, or
in the Layer 3 Drill Down.
Filter Filters are used to restrict analyses to a specific set of data. Analyses may have
different filters available depending on the technology they are designed for
and the database tables they are based on. For more information, see Using
Filters.
GEO Area A partition of the underlying GEOperformance database. This may or may not
correspond to a geographic area.
Layer A single metric shown on a map analysis. In map analyses that show multiple
metrics (such as the Ec/Io and RSCP for each bin), each metric is shown on a
separate layer. Layers can be viewed separately or superimposed. For more
information, see Layer View.
Metric Information shown on an analysis. These are also sometimes called KPIs or
columns.
Parameter Some analyses have options that users can set, such as the percentile to show.
These options are called parameters. For more information, see Analysis
Parameters.
Polygon A shape drawn on the map to select a specific area to analyze. For more
information, see Drawing Polygons.
Page 261
Presentation CanvasThe main GEOperformance workspace. The large pane on which analyses are
displayed.
Raster Analysis A Map analysis that displays data for each bin, rather than for each individual
call segment.
Segment Part of a call. Calls are split into segments at boundaries such as service
changes, handovers, or fifteen minute periods.
Snapshot A screenshot of the GEOperformance presentation canvas. For more
information, see Saving the Canvas as an Image.
Theme A color scheme that can be used to color code the network sites shown on the
map by features such as cell type or height. For more information, see
Network Themes.
Page 262
JDSU UK Ltd JDS Uniphase Corporation
Astor House Embassy Row 300
Newbury Business Park 6600 Peachtree Dunwoody Road
London Road Suite 150
Newbury Atlanta GA
Berkshire 30328
RG14 2PZ USA
United Kingdom
Tel: +44 (0) 1635 232470 Tel: +1 678 904 2424

Fax: +44 (0) 1635 232471 Fax: +1 678 904 2429
Email: info@arieso.com
Web: www.arieso.com
Page 263

Ariesogeo User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ariesogeo User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ariesoGEO User Guide

All trademarks are hereby acknowledged.

More information on Arieso can be found at www.arieso.com.

5 Analysis Reference 205

5.1 ................................................................................................................................... 205

1.1 The need for ariesoGEO

Measurement based ariesoGEO Data Traffic map

1.2 What are ariesoGEO features today

Advanced analyses allowing filtering per area/time/handset/

Optimization features, such as problem identification, neighbor

Web reporting to distribute scheduled and ad-hoc reports

Powerful data visualization capabilities in maps charts and tables

1.3 What can be done with ariesoGEO

1.4 Where the data comes from

1.5 Analysing the data

ariesoGEO indicating Sensitive Personal Information is on display

1.7 Further Information

1.8 Related Services

2.1 Logging in to ariesoGEO

ariesoGEO log in dialog

2.2 Running Analyses

If an analysis is dragged onto an incompatible Control, an Error dialog will be displayed:

Analysis not suitable dialog

Analysis has run and returned valid data.

Analysis has run and returned no data.

Analysis has not been run

Analysis is in process of running.

An error has occurred while attempting to run the analysis.

Analysis is Common across technologies.

Analysis is for GSM/GPRS.

Analysis is for LTE.

Analysis is for UMTS.

2.2.2 Analysis Parameters

Parameter Editor dialog

2.2.3 Recalculating Analyses

2.3 Working in ariesoGEO

The presentation canvas

Presentation Canvas button

ariesoGEO Control taskbar

Changing Display Properties

Typical properties for a Table control

Resizing, Moving and Deleting Controls

A control with buttons and selection handles

ariesoGEO Message Log dialog

GEOperformance Message Log button

2.3.2 Control Toolbox

The Control Toolbox

Chart Properties control

Legend showing color scheme and filter

ariesoGEO Textbox Control

Textbox control properties

The Data Explorer

Data Explorer Icons

Analyses. The analysis icon indicates the controls that

Map ( indicates that the map has multiple layers)

GEOperformance Data Explorer Color Schemes folders

GEOperformance Data Explorer Filters

Note: After a Filter is applied an analysis must be re-calculated.

Call Drilldown Layouts

GEOperformance Data Explorer Layer 3 Layouts

An example of using a Network Theme to color cells by RNC

Local folders right mouse menu

2.3.4 Menus and Toolbars